From 1bfaa5242fd4e6bdc7a4fe4c990191f5a86c8fd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Tue, 13 Nov 2018 14:31:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Fix header levels in intros (#1111) --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 56 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 32 +++++++++++++-------------- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 46 +++++++++++++++++++-------------------- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 42 ++++++++++++++++++------------------ en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 56 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_46-ROM.tsv | 32 +++++++++++++-------------- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 32 +++++++++++++-------------- en_tn_48-2CO.tsv | 26 +++++++++++----------- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 12 +++++------ en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 12 +++++------ en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 8 +++---- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 8 +++---- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 10 ++++----- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 12 +++++------ en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 8 +++---- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_59-HEB.tsv | 26 +++++++++++----------- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 10 ++++----- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 10 ++++----- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 10 ++++----- en_tn_67-REV.tsv | 44 ++++++++++++++++++------------------- 23 files changed, 255 insertions(+), 255 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index f32be8ed9..63caed859 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1––4:25)
1. Jesus' Sermon on the Mount (5:1––7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1––9:34)
1. Jesus' teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35––10:42)
1. Jesus' teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1––12:50)
1. Jesus' parables about the kingdom of God (13:1––52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53––17:57)
1. Jesus' teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1––35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1––22:46)
1. Jesus' teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1––25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1––28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "The Gospel of Matthew," or "The Gospel according to Matthew." Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, "The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the "kingdom of heaven?"

Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were Jesus' teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God's law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word "synoptic" means to "see together."

The texts are considered "parallel" when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the "Son of Man"?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the "Son of Man." It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a "son of man." That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus' time did not use "Son of Man" as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title "Son of Man" can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as "The Human One." It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:

* "Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you" (5:44)
* "For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen" (6:13)
* "But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting" (17:21)
* "For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost" (18:11)
* "Many are called, but few are chosen" (20:16)
* "Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows' houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation." (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators' region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew's Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

-MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 1 1 ava1 0 General Information: The author begins with Jesus' genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [Matthew 1:17](../01/17.md). MAT 1 1 y31w βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The book of the genealogy of Jesus Christ You could translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: "This is the list of the ancestors of Jesus Christ" MAT 1 1 vpg1 Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham There were many generations between Jesus, David, and Abraham. Here "son" means "descendant." Alternate translation: "Jesus Christ, a descendant of David, who was a descendant of Abraham" @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ MAT 1 24 nr5e 0 he took her as his wife "he married Mary" MAT 1 25 i7p5 figs-euphemism 0 he did not know her This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: "he did not have sexual relations with her" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 1 25 dlm9 υἱόν 1 to a son "to a male baby" or "to her son." Make sure it is clear that Joseph is not portrayed as the actual father. MAT 1 25 jtz8 0 Then he called his name Jesus "Joseph named the child Jesus" -MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "His star"

These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Learned men"

English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include "magi" and "wise men." These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word "learned men."
+MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "His star"

These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Learned men"

English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include "magi" and "wise men." These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word "learned men."
MAT 2 1 j9yn 0 General Information: A new part of the story begins here and continues through the end of the chapter. Matthew tells about Herod's attempt to kill the new King of the Jews. MAT 2 1 k518 Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Bethlehem of Judea "the town of Bethlehem in the province of Judea" MAT 2 1 id55 ἐν ... ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως 1 in the days of Herod the king "when Herod was king there" @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ MAT 2 22 h4cq translate-names Ἀρχέλαος 1 Archelaus This is the name of MAT 2 22 zk37 ἐφοβήθη ἐκεῖ 1 he was afraid "Joseph was afraid" MAT 2 23 dx5i figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν 1 what had been spoken through the prophets This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "what the Lord spoke long ago through the prophets" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 2 23 hc8g translate-names Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται 1 he would be called a Nazarene Here "he" refers to Jesus. The prophets before the time of Jesus would have referred to him as the Messiah or the Christ. Alternate translation: "people would say that the Christ is a Nazarene" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Bear fruit worthy of repentance"

Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The kingdom of heaven is near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
+MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Bear fruit worthy of repentance"

Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The kingdom of heaven is near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
MAT 3 1 xp3z 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of the ministry of John the Baptist. In verse 3, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that John the Baptist was God's appointed messenger to prepare for Jesus' ministry. MAT 3 1 d74m ἐν ... ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 In those days This is many years after Joseph and his family left Egypt and went to Nazareth. This is probably near the time that Jesus begins his ministry. Alternate translation: "Some time later" or "Some years later" MAT 3 2 w7e9 figs-you μετανοεῖτε 1 Repent This is plural in form. John is speaking to the crowds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν 1 coming down like a dove Possible meanings are 1) this is simply a statement that the Spirit was in the form of a dove or 2) this is a simile that compares the Spirit coming down upon Jesus gently, the way a dove would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-metonymy 0 a voice came out of the heavens saying "Jesus heard a voice from heaven." Here "voice" refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: "God spoke from heaven" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου, ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "the kingdom of heaven has come near"

No one knows for use whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase "is coming near" and "has come near."

#### "If you are the Son of God"

The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as "Because you are the Son of God" or "You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]])
+MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "the kingdom of heaven has come near"

No one knows for use whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase "is coming near" and "has come near."

### "If you are the Son of God"

The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as "Because you are the Son of God" or "You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]])
MAT 4 1 k51m 0 General Information: Here Matthew begins a new part of the story in which Jesus spends 40 days in the wilderness, where Satan tempts him. In verse 4, Jesus rebukes Satan with a quotation from Deuteronomy. MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη ... ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Spirit led Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so the devil could tempt Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ MAT 4 24 i296 figs-activepassive δαιμονιζομένους 1 those possesse MAT 4 24 p3nf figs-genericnoun σεληνιαζομένους 1 the epileptic This refers to anyone there who had epilepsy, not to a particular epileptic. Alternate translation: "those who sometimes had seizures" or "those who sometimes became unconscious and moved uncontrollably" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 4 24 qk4c figs-genericnoun καὶ ... παραλυτικούς 1 and paralytic This refers to anyone there who was paralyzed, not to a particular paralytic. Alternate translation: "and any who were paralyzed" or "and those who could not walk" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 4 25 i9m7 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 the Decapolis This name means "the Ten Towns." This is the name of a region to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word "blessed." This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "His disciples"

It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, "the twelve disciples." They would later become known as the apostles.
+MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word "blessed." This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "His disciples"

It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, "the twelve disciples." They would later become known as the apostles.
MAT 5 1 hz26 0 General Information: In verse 3, Jesus begins to describe the characteristics of people who are blessed. MAT 5 1 c5rq 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of a new part of the story in which Jesus begins to teach his disciples. This part continues through the end of chapter 7 and is frequently called the Sermon on the Mount. MAT 5 2 q9mm figs-idiom καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 He opened his mouth This is an idiom. Alternate translation: "Jesus began to speak" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ MAT 5 47 ba6e figs-rquestion 0 what do you do more than others? This question c MAT 5 47 ben5 ἀσπάσησθε 1 greet This is a general term for showing a desire for the well-being of the hearer. MAT 5 47 elw9 figs-rquestion 0 Do not even the Gentiles do the same thing? This question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: "Even the Gentiles do the same thing." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 5 48 l6pa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Matthew 6 continues Jesus' extended teaching known as "The Sermon on the Mount."

You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
+MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Matthew 6 continues Jesus' extended teaching known as "The Sermon on the Mount."

You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.
MAT 6 1 zvn1 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of "you" and "your" are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 1 at4q 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md). In this section, Jesus addresses the "acts of righteousness" of alms, prayer, and fasting. MAT 6 1 bgc7 figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before people to be seen by them It is implied that those who see the person will honor him. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "in front of people just so that they can see you and give you honor for what you have done" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -477,7 +477,7 @@ MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε ... πρῶτον τὴν βασιλ MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive 0 all these things will be given to you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will provide all these things for you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 34 qm2a οὖν 1 Therefore "Because of all this" MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification αὔριον ... μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of "tomorrow" as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

#### "By their fruits you will know them"

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
+MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

### "By their fruits you will know them"

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])
MAT 7 1 jav3 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. The instances of "you" and the commands are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 7 1 f4fe 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md). MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that "judge" has the strong meaning of "condemn harshly" or "declare guilty." Alternate translation: "Do not condemn people harshly" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ MAT 7 27 k4hi ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη 1 its destructi MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: These verses describe how the people in the crowds reacted to Jesus' teaching in the Sermon on the Mount. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) MAT 7 28 hu6z ἐγένετο, ὅτε 1 It came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus' teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: "When" or "After" MAT 7 28 b321 ἐξεπλήσσοντο ... ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 were astonished by his teaching It is clear in 7:29 that they were amazed not just at what Jesus taught but also the way he taught it. Alternate translation: "were amazed by the way he taught" -MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a new section.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Miracles

Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
+MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a new section.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that contains several accounts of Jesus healing people. This theme continues through [Matthew 9:35](../09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 8 1 clf8 0 When Jesus had come down from the hill, large crowds followed him "After Jesus came down from the hill, a large crowd followed him." The crowd may have included both people who had been with him on the mountain and people who had not been with him. MAT 8 2 vas8 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The word "behold" alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. @@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ MAT 8 33 ev2w figs-activepassive 0 what had happened to the men who had been po MAT 8 34 b2hp ἰδοὺ 1 Behold This marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. It may involve different people than the previous events. Your language may have a way of showing this. MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 all the city The word "city" is a metonym for the people of the city. The word "all" is probably an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out. Not necessarily every person came out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 8 34 bsf4 τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 their region "their area" -MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 09 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Sinners"

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

#### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

#### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
+MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Sinners"

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]])
MAT 9 1 nl8w 0 Connecting Statement: Matthew returns to the theme, which he began in [Matthew 8:1](../08/01.md), of Jesus healing people. This begins an account of Jesus healing a paralyzed man. MAT 9 1 ly42 figs-activepassive 0 Jesus entered a boat It is implied that the disciples were with Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 1 cs8l 0 a boat This is probably the same boat as in [Matthew 8:23](../08/23.md). You only need to specify this if needed to avoid confusion. @@ -787,7 +787,7 @@ MAT 9 37 mur4 writing-proverbs 0 The harvest is plentiful, but the laborers are MAT 9 37 m6ke 0 The harvest is plentiful "There is plenty of ripe food for someone to collect" MAT 9 37 h3a2 ἐργάται 1 laborers "workers" MAT 9 38 vz8y δεήθητε ... τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 pray to the Lord of the harvest "pray to God, because he is in charge of the harvest" -MAT 10 intro m5iu 0 # Matthew 10 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The sending of the twelve disciples

Many verses in this chapter describe how Jesus sent the twelve disciples out. He sent them to tell his message about the kingdom of heaven. They were to tell his message only in Israel and not to share it with the Gentiles.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

#### "The kingdom of heaven has come near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
+MAT 10 intro m5iu 0 # Matthew 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The sending of the twelve disciples

Many verses in this chapter describe how Jesus sent the twelve disciples out. He sent them to tell his message about the kingdom of heaven. They were to tell his message only in Israel and not to share it with the Gentiles.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### "The kingdom of heaven has come near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
MAT 10 1 nhp2 0 Connecting Statement: This begins an account of Jesus sending out his twelve disciples to do his work. MAT 10 1 gjs9 translate-numbers προσκαλεσάμενος τοὺς δώδεκα μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 called his twelve disciples together "summoned his 12 disciples" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 10 1 x1er ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν 1 gave them authority Be sure that the text clearly communicates that this authority was 1) to drive out unclean spirits and 2) to heal disease and sickness. @@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ MAT 10 42 lza6 0 because he is a disciple "because he is my disciple." Here "h MAT 10 42 wx29 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 truly I say to you "I tell you the truth." This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 10 42 y1ie οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 he will ... his reward Here "he" and "his" refer to the one who is giving. MAT 10 42 d61l οὐ μὴ ἀπολέσῃ 1 he will in no way lose "God will not deny him." This has nothing to do with having a possession taken away. It can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "God will certainly give him" -MAT 11 intro puf4 0 # Matthew 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 11:10.

Some scholars believe that [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md) begins a new stage in the ministry of Christ because of Israel's rejection of him.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Hidden revelation

After [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md), Jesus begins to reveal information about himself and about the plans of God the Father, while hiding this information from those who reject him ([Matthew 11:25](../../mat/11/25.md)).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The kingdom of heaven is near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
+MAT 11 intro puf4 0 # Matthew 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 11:10.

Some scholars believe that [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md) begins a new stage in the ministry of Christ because of Israel's rejection of him.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hidden revelation

After [Matthew 11:20](../../mat/11/20.md), Jesus begins to reveal information about himself and about the plans of God the Father, while hiding this information from those who reject him ([Matthew 11:25](../../mat/11/25.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The kingdom of heaven is near"

No one knows for sure whether the "kingdom of heaven" was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase "at hand," but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases "is coming near" and "has come near."
MAT 11 1 z2y7 writing-newevent 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of how Jesus responded to disciples of John the Baptist. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 11 1 dr3u ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 It came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus' teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: "Then" or "After" MAT 11 1 ki7f ἐτέλεσεν ... διατάσσων 1 had finished instructing "had finished teaching" or "had finished commanding." @@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ MAT 11 29 i3qs figs-metonymy ταπεινὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 lowly in he MAT 11 29 i3ls figs-synecdoche εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν 1 you will find rest for your souls Here "soul" refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: "you will find rest for yourselves" or "you will be able to rest" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism 0 For my yoke is easy and my burden is light Both of these phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that it is easier to obey him than it is the Jewish law. Alternate translation: "For what I place on you, you will be able to carry because it is light" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 11 30 tc2g τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 my burden is light The word "light" here is the opposite of heavy, not the opposite of dark. -MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God's people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

#### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
+MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God's people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
MAT 12 1 u1f2 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus' ministry. Here, the Pharisees criticize his disciples for picking grain on the Sabbath. MAT 12 1 m2n1 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This marks a new part of the story. Alternate translation: "A little later" MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown σπορίμων 1 grainfields a place to plant grain. If wheat is unknown and "grain" is too general, then you can use "fields of the plant they made bread from." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1277,7 +1277,7 @@ MAT 12 49 rxe8 figs-metaphor 0 here are my mother and my brothers This is a met MAT 12 50 e25c ὅστις γὰρ ... ποιήσῃ 1 whoever does "anyone who does" MAT 12 50 mq9r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 12 50 gn31 figs-metaphor 0 that person is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor meaning that those who obey God belong to Jesus' spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.

This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus' parables about the kingdom of heaven.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word "heaven" when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 13:11](../../mat/13/11.md)).

#### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus "sat beside the sea" ([Matthew 13:1](../../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Metaphor

Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus' message ([Matthew 13:19](../../mat/13/19.md)).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, "they were scorched" ([Matthew 13:6](../../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

#### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Matthew 13:11-13](./11.md)).
+MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.

This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus' parables about the kingdom of heaven.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word "heaven" when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 13:11](../../mat/13/11.md)).

### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus "sat beside the sea" ([Matthew 13:1](../../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metaphor

Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus' message ([Matthew 13:19](../../mat/13/19.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, "they were scorched" ([Matthew 13:6](../../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Matthew 13:11-13](./11.md)).
MAT 13 1 r4xv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Jesus begins to teach the crowds, using parables, about the kingdom of heaven. MAT 13 1 vx5y ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that day These events happened on the same day as those in the previous chapter. MAT 13 1 cy1t ἐξελθὼν ... τῆς οἰκίας 1 out of the house It is not mentioned at whose house Jesus was staying. @@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ MAT 13 57 azn4 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτι MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his own country "his own region" or "his own hometown" MAT 13 57 w4x8 ἐν ... τῇ ... οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family "in his own home" MAT 13 58 e2cp οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς 1 He did not do many miracles there "Jesus did not do many miracles in his own hometown" -MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [Matthew 4:12](../../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

### Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John's head to Herodias's daughter ([Matthew 14:11](../../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [Matthew 4:12](../../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John's head to Herodias's daughter ([Matthew 14:11](../../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
MAT 14 1 zl7x figs-events 0 General Information: These verses explain Herod's reaction when he heard about Jesus. This event happens some time after the events that follow in the narrative. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) MAT 14 1 q8h5 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 About that time "In those days" or "While Jesus was ministering in Galilee" MAT 14 1 l9ur ἤκουσεν ... τὴν ἀκοὴν Ἰησοῦ 1 heard the news about Jesus "heard reports about Jesus" or "heard about the fame of Jesus" @@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ MAT 14 35 xd7c 0 they sent messages "the men of that area sent messages" MAT 14 36 ql3y παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 They begged him "The sick people begged him" MAT 14 36 x8jv τοῦ ... ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 his garment "his robe" or "what he was wearing" MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "became well" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The "traditions of the elders"

The "traditions of the elders" were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

#### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus' time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman's daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The "traditions of the elders"

The "traditions of the elders" were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus' time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman's daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: "Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 15 2 yn6l παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 traditions of the elders This is not the same as the law of Moses. This refers to later teachings and interpretations of the law given by religious leaders after Moses. @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ MAT 15 38 udk7 οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες 1 Those who ate "The people who MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 four thousand men "4,000 men" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 be43 τὰ ὅρια 1 the region "the area" MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 Magadan This region is sometimes called "Magdala." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to "follow" him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it" ([Matthew 16:25](../../mat/16/25.md)).
+MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to "follow" him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it" ([Matthew 16:25](../../mat/16/25.md)).
MAT 16 1 t249 0 General Information: This begins an encounter between Jesus and the Pharisees and Sadducees. MAT 16 1 t7p5 0 tested him Here "tested" is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: "challenged him" or "wanted to trap him" MAT 16 2 jff6 figs-explicit 0 When it is evening The situation can be stated more clearly. Alternate translation: "If the sky is red in the evening" or "If the sky is red when the sun is setting" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1720,7 +1720,7 @@ MAT 16 28 ytr3 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you "I tell you MAT 16 28 k2d1 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 you All occurrences of this word are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 16 28 wq13 figs-idiom οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 will not taste death Here "taste" means to experience. Alternate translation: "will not experience death" or" will not die" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 16 28 b2pb figs-metonymy ἕως ... ἴδωσιν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 until they see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom Here "his kingdom" represents him being King. Alternate translation: "until they see the Son of Man coming as King" or "until they see the evidence that the Son of Man is King" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

#### "transfigured"

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus' body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])
+MAT 17 intro yb4k 0 # Matthew 17 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

The Old Testament prophet Malachi lived many years before Jesus was born. Malachi had said that before the Messiah came a prophet named Elijah would return. Jesus explained that Malachi had been talking about John the Baptist. Jesus said this because John the Baptist had done what Malachi had said that Elijah would do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### "transfigured"

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Matthew says in this chapter that Jesus' body shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])
MAT 17 1 u6dw 0 General Information: This begins the account of Jesus' transfiguration. MAT 17 1 nva7 τὸν Πέτρον ... Ἰάκωβον, καὶ Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Peter, James, and John his brother "Peter, James, and James's brother John" MAT 17 2 xx8e μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 He was transfigured before them When they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been. @@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@ MAT 17 27 ebj4 τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 its mouth "the fish's mouth" MAT 17 27 t9t8 translate-bmoney στατῆρα 1 a shekel a silver coin worth four days' wages (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MAT 17 27 ej3l 0 Take it "Take the shekel" MAT 17 27 km3v figs-you ἀντὶ ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ 1 for me and you Here "you" is singular and refers to Peter. Each man had to pay a half shekel tax. So one shekel would be enough for Jesus and Peter to pay their taxes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 18 intro m4y6 0 # Matthew 18 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### What should Jesus' followers do when other followers sin against them?

Jesus taught that his followers must treat each other well and not be angry with each other. They should forgive anyone who is sorry for his sin, even if he has committed the same sin before. If he is not sorry for his sin, Jesus' followers should speak with him alone or in a small group. If he is still not sorry after that, then Jesus' followers can treat him as guilty. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+MAT 18 intro m4y6 0 # Matthew 18 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### What should Jesus' followers do when other followers sin against them?

Jesus taught that his followers must treat each other well and not be angry with each other. They should forgive anyone who is sorry for his sin, even if he has committed the same sin before. If he is not sorry for his sin, Jesus' followers should speak with him alone or in a small group. If he is still not sorry after that, then Jesus' followers can treat him as guilty. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
MAT 18 1 f7zv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 18:35](../18/35.md), where Jesus teaches about life in the kingdom of heaven. Here, Jesus uses a little child to teach the disciples. MAT 18 1 iri5 τίς ... μείζων ἐστὶν 1 Who is greatest "Who is the most important" or "Who among us will be the most important" MAT 18 1 pp31 figs-metonymy ἐν ... τῇ ... Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 in the kingdom of heaven The phrase "kingdom of heaven" refers to God's rule as king. This phrase is used only in the book of Matthew. If possible, keep "heaven" in your translation. Alternate translation: "in God's kingdom" or "when our God in heaven establishes his rule on earth" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1879,7 +1879,7 @@ MAT 18 34 e14m figs-activepassive τὸ ὀφειλόμενον 1 that was owed MAT 18 35 pm1d guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 18 35 q8p9 figs-you 0 to you ... your All occurrences of these words are plural. Jesus is speaking to his disciples, but this parable teaches a general truth that applies to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 18 35 c4fw figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν 1 from your heart Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's inner being. The phrase "from your heart" is an idiom that means "sincerely." Alternate translation: "sincerely" or "completely" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 19 intro ewl5 0 # Matthew 19 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Divorce

Jesus taught about divorce because the Pharisees wanted people to think Jesus' teachings about divorce were wrong ([Matthew 19:3-12](./03.md)). Jesus talked about what God had first said about marriage when he created it.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word "heaven" when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 1:12](../../mat/01/12.md)).
+MAT 19 intro ewl5 0 # Matthew 19 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Jesus taught about divorce because the Pharisees wanted people to think Jesus' teachings about divorce were wrong ([Matthew 19:3-12](./03.md)). Jesus talked about what God had first said about marriage when he created it.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says the word "heaven" when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([Matthew 1:12](../../mat/01/12.md)).
MAT 19 1 nj6t writing-background 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 22:46](../22/46.md), which tells of Jesus ministering in Judea. These verses provide background information of how Jesus came to be in Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 19 1 ap4g ἐγένετο, ὅτε 1 It came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus' teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: "When" or "After" MAT 19 1 c5j9 figs-metonymy ἐτέλεσεν ... τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 had finished these words Here "words" refers to what Jesus taught starting in [Matthew 18:1](../18/01.md). Alternate translation: "had finished teaching these things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ MAT 19 29 gq8p figs-metonymy ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀνόματός MAT 19 29 bzt3 translate-numbers ἑκατονταπλασίονα λήμψεται 1 receive one hundred times "receive from God 100 times as many good things as they gave up" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 19 29 z8wb figs-idiom ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσει 1 inherit eternal life This is an idiom that means "God will bless them with eternal life" or "God will cause them to live forever." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 19 30 u8p3 πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι 1 But many who are first will be last, and the last will be first Here "first" and "last" refer to people's status or importance. Jesus is contrasting people's status now with their status in the kingdom of heaven. Alternate translation: "But many who seem to be important now will be the least important, and many who seem to be unimportant now will be very important" -MAT 20 intro z39h 0 # Matthew 20 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The parable of the landowner and his vineyard

Jesus tells this parable ([Matthew 20:1-16](./01.md)) to teach his disciples that what God says is right is different from what people say is right.
+MAT 20 intro z39h 0 # Matthew 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the landowner and his vineyard

Jesus tells this parable ([Matthew 20:1-16](./01.md)) to teach his disciples that what God says is right is different from what people say is right.
MAT 20 1 k7sw 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells a parable about a landowner who hires workers, to illustrate how God will reward those who belong to the kingdom of heaven. MAT 20 1 q9qc figs-parables ὁμοία γάρ ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 For the kingdom of heaven is like This is the beginning of a parable. See how you translated the introduction to the parable in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 20 2 wd43 συμφωνήσας 1 After he had agreed "After the landowner had agreed" @@ -2030,7 +2030,7 @@ MAT 20 32 f5mw ἐφώνησεν αὐτοὺς 1 called to them "called to the MAT 20 32 fd9x θέλετε 1 do you wish "do you want" MAT 20 33 yb39 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἀνοιγῶσιν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἡμῶν 1 that our eyes may be opened The men speak of becoming able to see as if there eyes were to be opened. Because of Jesus' previous question, we understand that they were expressing their desire. Alternate translation: "we want you to open our eyes" or "we want to be able to see" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 20 34 q9iq σπλαγχνισθεὶς 1 being moved with compassion "having compassion" or "feeling compassion for them" -MAT 21 intro ni1x 0 # Matthew 21 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 21:5,16 and 42, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

#### Hosanna

This is what the people shouted to welcome Jesus into Jerusalem. This word meant "Save us," but people used it to praise God.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The kingdom of God will be taken away from you"

No one knows for sure what this phrase means. No one knows if Jesus meant that God would someday give the kingdom back or not.
+MAT 21 intro ni1x 0 # Matthew 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 21:5,16 and 42, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

### Hosanna

This is what the people shouted to welcome Jesus into Jerusalem. This word meant "Save us," but people used it to praise God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The kingdom of God will be taken away from you"

No one knows for sure what this phrase means. No one knows if Jesus meant that God would someday give the kingdom back or not.
MAT 21 1 f8fs 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus' entry into Jerusalem. Here he gives his disciples instructions about what they are to do. MAT 21 1 p3g6 translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage This is a village near Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 21 2 wen2 figs-activepassive ὄνον δεδεμένην 1 a donkey tied up You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: "a donkey that someone has tied up" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2130,7 +2130,7 @@ MAT 21 44 r7up figs-metaphor ὁ πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὸν λίθον τοῦ MAT 21 44 ghz2 figs-parallelism 0 But anyone on whom it falls will be crushed This means basically the same thing as the previous sentence. It is a metaphor that means the Christ will have the final judgment and will destroy everyone who rebels against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 21 45 gh8w 0 Connecting Statement: The religious leaders react to the parable that Jesus told. MAT 21 45 qpy9 τὰς παραβολὰς αὐτοῦ 1 his parables "Jesus' parables" -MAT 22 intro k5ze 0 # Matthew 22 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verse 44, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Wedding Feast

In the parable of the wedding feast ([Matthew 22:1-14](./01.md)), Jesus taught that when God offers to save a person, that person needs to accept the offer. Jesus spoke of life with God as a feast that a king prepares for his son, who has just gotten married. In addition, Jesus emphasized that not everyone whom God invites will properly prepare themselves to come to the feast. God will throw these people out from the feast.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When the king in the parable said, "My oxen and fattened calves have been killed" ([Matthew 22:4](../../mat/22/04.md)), he assumed that the hearers would understand that those who had killed the animals had also cooked them.

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. To the Jews, the ancestors were the masters of the descendants, but in one psalm David calls one of his descendants "Lord." Jesus tells the Jewish leaders that this is a paradox, saying, "If David then calls the Christ 'Lord,' how is he David's son?" ([Matthew 22:45](../../mat/22/45.md)).
+MAT 22 intro k5ze 0 # Matthew 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verse 44, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wedding Feast

In the parable of the wedding feast ([Matthew 22:1-14](./01.md)), Jesus taught that when God offers to save a person, that person needs to accept the offer. Jesus spoke of life with God as a feast that a king prepares for his son, who has just gotten married. In addition, Jesus emphasized that not everyone whom God invites will properly prepare themselves to come to the feast. God will throw these people out from the feast.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When the king in the parable said, "My oxen and fattened calves have been killed" ([Matthew 22:4](../../mat/22/04.md)), he assumed that the hearers would understand that those who had killed the animals had also cooked them.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. To the Jews, the ancestors were the masters of the descendants, but in one psalm David calls one of his descendants "Lord." Jesus tells the Jewish leaders that this is a paradox, saying, "If David then calls the Christ 'Lord,' how is he David's son?" ([Matthew 22:45](../../mat/22/45.md)).
MAT 22 1 z8vz figs-parables 0 To rebuke the religious leaders and to illustrate their unbelief, Jesus tells a parable about a marriage feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 22 1 bc6y αὐτοῖς 1 to them "to the people" MAT 22 2 xps3 ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of heaven is like This is the beginning of a parable. See how you translated this in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). @@ -2216,7 +2216,7 @@ MAT 22 45 d8gl figs-rquestion 0 If David then calls the Christ 'Lord,' how is h MAT 22 45 x9uh 0 If David then calls the Christ David referred to Jesus as "Lord" because Jesus was not only a descendant of David, but he was also superior to him. MAT 22 46 n3hw figs-metonymy ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον 1 to answer him a word Here "word" refers to what people say. Alternate translation: "to answer him anything" or "to answer him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 22 46 c1f2 figs-explicit 0 any more questions It is implied that no one asked him the kind of questions that were intended to make him say something wrong so the religious leaders could arrest him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 23 intro m99i 0 # Matthew 23 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Hypocrites

Jesus calls the Pharisees hypocrites many times ([Matthew 23:13](../../mat/23/13.md)) and carefully tells what he means by doing that. The Pharisees made rules that no one could actually obey, and then they persuaded the ordinary people that they were guilty because they could not obey the rules. Also, the Pharisees obeyed their own rules instead of obeying God's original commands in the law of Moses.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Name calling

In most cultures, it is wrong to insult people. The Pharisees took many of the words in this chapter as insults. Jesus called them "hypocrites," "blind guides," "fools," and "serpents" ([Matthew 23:16-17](./16.md)). Jesus uses these words say that God would surely punish them because they were doing wrong.

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "He who is greatest among you will be your servant" ([Matthew 23:11-12](./11.md)).
+MAT 23 intro m99i 0 # Matthew 23 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hypocrites

Jesus calls the Pharisees hypocrites many times ([Matthew 23:13](../../mat/23/13.md)) and carefully tells what he means by doing that. The Pharisees made rules that no one could actually obey, and then they persuaded the ordinary people that they were guilty because they could not obey the rules. Also, the Pharisees obeyed their own rules instead of obeying God's original commands in the law of Moses.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Name calling

In most cultures, it is wrong to insult people. The Pharisees took many of the words in this chapter as insults. Jesus called them "hypocrites," "blind guides," "fools," and "serpents" ([Matthew 23:16-17](./16.md)). Jesus uses these words say that God would surely punish them because they were doing wrong.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "He who is greatest among you will be your servant" ([Matthew 23:11-12](./11.md)).
MAT 23 1 skq4 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [Matthew 25:46](../25/46.md), where Jesus teaches about salvation and the final judgment. Here he begins to warn the people about the scribes and Pharisees. MAT 23 2 dnu3 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῆς Μωϋσέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν 1 sit in Moses' seat Here "seat" represents the authority to rule and make judgments. Alternate translation: "have authority as Moses had" or "have authority to say what the law of Moses means" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 3 q336 0 whatever ... do these things and observe them "all the things ... do them and observe them" or "everything ... do it and observe it" @@ -2308,7 +2308,7 @@ MAT 23 38 r6ss ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημ MAT 23 38 ck2z figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house Possible meanings are 1) "the city of Jerusalem" or 2) "the temple." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 39 i14n 0 I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 23 39 ig61 figs-metonymy εὐλογημένος‘ ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord Here "in the name" means "in the power" or "as a representative." See how you translated this in [Matthew 21:9](../21/09.md). Alternate translation: "He who comes in the power of the Lord is blessed" or "He who comes as the representative of the Lord will be blessed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 24 intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The end of the age"

In this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### The example of Noah

In the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Let"

The ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as "let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains" (24:16), "let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house" (24:17), and "let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak" (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages.
+MAT 24 intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The end of the age"

In this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The example of Noah

In the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Let"

The ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as "let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains" (24:16), "let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house" (24:17), and "let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak" (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages.
MAT 24 1 dh7u 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins to describe events that will happen before he comes again during the end times. MAT 24 1 ke79 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ 1 from the temple It is implied that Jesus was not in the temple itself. He was in the courtyard around the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 24 2 mh5y figs-rquestion 0 Do you not see all these things? Jesus uses a question to make the disciples think deeply about what he will tell them. Alternate translation: "Let me tell you something about all these buildings." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -2403,7 +2403,7 @@ MAT 24 50 bz5k figs-parallelism 0 on a day that the servant does not expect and MAT 24 51 jj2z figs-idiom 0 cut him in pieces This is an idiom that means to make the person suffer terribly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 24 51 pm18 0 assign him a place with the hypocrites "put him with the hypocrites" or "send him to the place where hypocrites are sent" MAT 24 51 rwd5 translate-symaction 0 there will be weeping and grinding of teeth "Grinding of teeth" here is a symbolic act, representing extreme suffering. See how you translated this in [Matthew 8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: "people will weep and grind their teeth because of their suffering" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MAT 25 intro qe8a 0 # Matthew 25 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter continues the teaching of the previous chapter.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The parable of the ten virgins

Jesus told the parable of the ten virgins ([Matthew 25:1-13](./01.md)) to tell his followers to be ready for him to return. His hearers could understand the parable because they knew Jewish wedding customs.

When the Jews arranged marriages, they would plan for the wedding to take place weeks or months later. At the proper time, the young man would go to his bride's house, where she would be waiting for him. The wedding ceremony would take place, and then the man and his bride would travel to his home, where there would be a feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

+MAT 25 intro qe8a 0 # Matthew 25 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter continues the teaching of the previous chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the ten virgins

Jesus told the parable of the ten virgins ([Matthew 25:1-13](./01.md)) to tell his followers to be ready for him to return. His hearers could understand the parable because they knew Jewish wedding customs.

When the Jews arranged marriages, they would plan for the wedding to take place weeks or months later. At the proper time, the young man would go to his bride's house, where she would be waiting for him. The wedding ceremony would take place, and then the man and his bride would travel to his home, where there would be a feast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

MAT 25 1 em28 figs-parables 0 Jesus tells a parable about wise and foolish virgins to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 1 pg5i figs-metonymy ὁμοιωθήσεται ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of heaven will be like Here "kingdom of heaven" refers to God's rule as king. The phrase "kingdom of heaven" is used only in Matthew. If possible, use "heaven" in your translation. See how you translated this in [Matthew 13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: "when our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 25 1 uhj1 τὰς λαμπάδας αυτών 1 lamps These could have been 1) lamps or 2) torches made by putting cloth around the end of a stick and wetting the cloth with oil. @@ -2501,7 +2501,7 @@ MAT 25 45 whu5 0 you did not do for me "I consider that you did not do it for MAT 25 46 m6me ἀπελεύσονται οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον 1 These will go away into eternal punishment "The King will send these to a place where they will receive punishment that never ends" MAT 25 46 nj72 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν 1 but the righteous into eternal life The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: "but the King will send the righteous to the place where they will live forever with God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 25 46 kq5b figs-nominaladj οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι 1 the righteous This nominative adjective can be stated as an adjective. Alternate translation: "the righteous people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sheep
Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words "the sheep" to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.

#### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but "passed over" the Israelites and let them live.

#### The eating of the body and blood
[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Judas' kiss for Jesus
[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.

#### "I am able to destroy the temple of God"
Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it "in three days" ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)).
+MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sheep
Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words "the sheep" to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.

### Passover
The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but "passed over" the Israelites and let them live.

### The eating of the body and blood
[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Judas' kiss for Jesus
[Matthew 26:49](../../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.

### "I am able to destroy the temple of God"
Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it "in three days" ([Matthew 26:61](../../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../../jhn/02/19.md)).
MAT 26 1 t5mz 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that tells of Jesus' crucifixion, death, and resurrection. Here he tells his disciples how he will suffer and die. MAT 26 1 i35c ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 It came about that when "After" or "Then, after." This phrase shifts the story from Jesus' teachings to what happened next. MAT 26 1 xiv4 πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 all these words This refers to all that Jesus taught starting in [Matthew 24:3](../24/03.md). @@ -2671,7 +2671,7 @@ MAT 26 73 w8ww γὰρ ἡ λαλιά σου δῆλόν σε ποιεῖ 1 for MAT 26 74 edd8 καταθεματίζειν 1 to curse "to call down a curse on himself" MAT 26 74 w87b ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν 1 rooster crowed A rooster is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. The sound a rooster makes is called "crowing." See how you translated this in [Matthew 26:34](../26/34.md). MAT 26 75 nx3j figs-quotations 0 Peter remembered the words that Jesus had said, "Before the rooster crows you will deny me three times." This direct quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: "Peter remembered that Jesus told him that before the rooster crowed, he would deny Jesus three times" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 27 intro deu4 0 # Matthew 27 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Delivered him to Pilate the governor"

The Jewish leaders needed to get permission from Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor, before they could kill Jesus. This was because Roman law did not allow them to kill Jesus themselves. Pilate wanted to set Jesus free, but they wanted him to free a very bad prisoner named Barabbas.

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 27:60](../../mat/27/60.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Sarcasm

The soldiers said, "Hail, King of the Jews!" ([Matthew 27:29](../../mat/27/29.md)) to mock Jesus. They did not think that he was the king of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+MAT 27 intro deu4 0 # Matthew 27 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Delivered him to Pilate the governor"

The Jewish leaders needed to get permission from Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor, before they could kill Jesus. This was because Roman law did not allow them to kill Jesus themselves. Pilate wanted to set Jesus free, but they wanted him to free a very bad prisoner named Barabbas.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 27:60](../../mat/27/60.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers said, "Hail, King of the Jews!" ([Matthew 27:29](../../mat/27/29.md)) to mock Jesus. They did not think that he was the king of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
MAT 27 1 hvr4 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus' trial before Pilate. MAT 27 1 qe1s 0 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 27 1 cm46 figs-explicit συμβούλιον ἔλαβον ... κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν 1 plotted against Jesus to put him to death The Jewish leaders were planning how they could convince the Roman leaders to kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2794,7 +2794,7 @@ MAT 27 64 u5tg figs-ellipsis 0 and the last deception will be worse than the fi MAT 27 65 dkq9 κουστωδίαν 1 a guard This consisted of four to sixteen Roman soldiers. MAT 27 66 pk1q σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον 1 sealing the stone Possible meanings are 1) they put a cord around the stone and attached it to the rock wall on either side of the entrance to the tomb or 2) they put seals between the stone and the wall. MAT 27 66 e8uf 0 placing the guard "telling the soldiers to stand where they could keep people from tampering with the tomb" -MAT 28 intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

#### "Make disciples"

The last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](./19.md)) are commonly known as "The Great Commission" because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to "make disciples" by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### An angel of the Lord

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+MAT 28 intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### "Make disciples"

The last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](./19.md)) are commonly known as "The Great Commission" because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to "make disciples" by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### An angel of the Lord

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
MAT 28 1 anr1 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of the resurrection of Jesus from the dead. MAT 28 1 qkn8 0 Now late on the Sabbath, as it began to dawn toward the first day of the week "After the Sabbath ended, as the sun came up on Sunday morning" MAT 28 1 gs43 0 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 75f877b92..1bd62dce1 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1––13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
- Early ministry (1:14––3:6)
- Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7––5:43)
- Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1––8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27––10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1––13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1––16:8)

### What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "The Gospel of Mark," or "The Gospel according to Mark." They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, "The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus' teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God's law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word "synoptic" means to "see together."

The texts are considered "parallel" when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the "Son of Man"?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the "Son of Man." It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a "son of man." That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus' time did not use "Son of Man" as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title "Son of Man" can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as "The Human One." It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word "immediately" forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators' region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark's Gospel.

* "If any man has ears to hear, let him hear." (7:16)
* "where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched" (9:44)
* "where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched" (9:46)
* "And the scripture was fulfilled that says, 'He was counted with the lawless ones'" (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark's Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.

* "Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, 'Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.' After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them." (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

-MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "You can make me clean"
Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically "clean" or healthy as well as spiritually "clean" or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

#### "The kingdom of God is near"

Scholars debate whether the "kingdom of God" was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase "at hand," but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase "is coming" and "has come near."
+MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "You can make me clean"
Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically "clean" or healthy as well as spiritually "clean" or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### "The kingdom of God is near"

Scholars debate whether the "kingdom of God" was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase "at hand," but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase "is coming" and "has come near."
MRK 1 1 s8qp 0 General Information: The book of Mark begins with the prophet Isaiah's foretelling of the coming of John the Baptist, who baptizes Jesus. The author is Mark, also called John Mark, who is the son of one of the several women named Mary mentioned in the four Gospels. He is also the nephew of Barnabas. MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face This is an idiom that means "ahead of you." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ MRK 1 45 bn6r ὥστε 1 so much that The man spread the news so much that MRK 1 45 l9es figs-explicit ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν 1 that Jesus could no longer enter a town openly This was the result of the man spreading the news so much. Here "openly" is a metaphor for "publicly." Jesus could not enter the towns because many people would crowd around him. Alternate translation: "that Jesus could no longer enter a town publicly" or "that Jesus could no longer enter the towns in a way that many people would see him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 45 d5lw ἐρήμοις τόποις 1 remote places "lonely places" or "places where no one lived" MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from everywhere The word "everywhere" is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. Alternate translation: "from all over the region" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Sinners"

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

#### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God's Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Sinners"

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God's Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
MRK 2 1 se22 0 Connecting Statement: After preaching and healing people throughout Galilee, Jesus returns to Capernaum where he heals and forgives the sin of a paralyzed man. MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he was at home This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the people there heard that he was staying at his home" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 2 d3iy figs-explicit 0 So many gathered there The word "there" refers to the house that Jesus stayed it in Capernaum. Alternate translation: "So many people gathered there" or "So many people came to the house" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ MRK 2 26 y57j ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 bread of the presence MRK 2 27 i374 figs-activepassive τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο 1 The Sabbath was made for mankind Jesus makes clear why God established the Sabbath. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God made the Sabbath for mankind" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 27 u83s figs-gendernotations τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 mankind "man" or "people" or "the needs of people." This word here refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MRK 2 27 s2yd figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 not mankind for the Sabbath The words "was made" are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: "mankind was not made for the Sabbath" or "God did not make mankind for the Sabbath" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sabbath
It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was "work," so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

#### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

#### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
+MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath
It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was "work," so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
MRK 3 1 cp3e 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus heals a man on the Sabbath in the synagogue and shows how he feels about what the Pharisees had done with the Sabbath rules. The Pharisees and Herodians begin to plan to put Jesus to death. MRK 3 1 y5l9 0 a man with a withered hand "a man with a crippled hand" MRK 3 2 v2yj 0 Some people watched him closely to see if he would heal him "Some people watched Jesus closely to see if he would heal the man with the withered hand" @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ MRK 3 32 wms6 ζητοῦσίν σε 1 are looking for you "are asking for you" MRK 3 33 qe8c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Who are my mother and my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people. Alternate translation: "I will tell you who are really my mother and brothers" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 3 35 dr45 0 whoever does ... that person is "those who do ... they are" MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 that person is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means Jesus' disciples belong to Jesus' spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: "that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.
+MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.
MRK 4 1 a6pk figs-parables 0 As Jesus taught from a boat at the seaside, he told them the parable of the soils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MRK 4 1 i95e τὴν θάλασσαν 1 the sea This is the Sea of Galilee. MRK 4 3 vqh3 ἀκούετε ... ὁ σπείρων 1 Listen! A farmer "Pay attention! A farmer" @@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ MRK 4 39 ag41 γαλήνη μεγάλη 1 a great calm "a great stillness over MRK 4 40 h7n3 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 Then he said to them "And Jesus said to his disciples" MRK 4 40 w5n4 figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 Why are you afraid? Do you still not have faith? Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are afraid when he is with them. These questions can be written as statements. Alternate translation: "You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 41 u8e1 figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ 1 Who then is this, because even the wind and the sea obey him? The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: "This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 05 General Notes
### Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Talitha, koum"

The words "Talitha, koum" ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 05 General Notes
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Talitha, koum"

The words "Talitha, koum" ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
MRK 5 1 fix1 0 Connecting Statement: After Jesus calms the great storm, he heals a man who has many demons, but the local people in Gerasa are not glad about his healing, and they beg Jesus to leave. MRK 5 1 gt8a ἦλθον 1 They came The word "They" refers to Jesus and his disciples. MRK 5 1 ahx8 τῆς θαλάσσης 1 the sea This refers to the Sea of Galilee. @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ MRK 5 42 pt5t translate-numbers ἦν ... ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 she was twel MRK 5 43 i5ja figs-quotations διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο, καὶ 1 He strictly ordered them that no one should know about this. Then This can be stated as a direct quote. Alternate translation: "He ordered them strictly, 'No one should know about this!' Then" or "He ordered them strictly, 'Do not tell anyone about what I have done!' Then" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MRK 5 43 ij1k διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ 1 He strictly ordered them "He strongly commanded them" MRK 5 43 n29k figs-quotations 0 Then he told them to give her something to eat. This can be stated as a direct quote. Alternate translation: "And he told them, 'Give her something to eat.'" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Anointed with oil"

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.
+MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Anointed with oil"

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them.
MRK 6 1 mi7z 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus returns to his hometown, where he is not accepted. MRK 6 1 mjr1 τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown This refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up and where his family lived. This does not mean that he owned land there. MRK 6 2 y4xj 0 What is this wisdom that has been given to him? This question, which contains passive construction, can be asked in active form. Alternate translation: "What is this wisdom that he has gained?" @@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ MRK 6 56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 They begged him Possible mean MRK 6 56 m366 ἅψωνται 1 let them touch The word "them" refers to the sick. MRK 6 56 wd2u τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 the edge of his garment "the hem of his robe" or "the edge of his clothes" MRK 6 56 ugr3 ὅσοι ἂν 1 as many as "all those who" -MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Ephphatha"

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Ephphatha"

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
MRK 7 1 hu3f 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus rebukes the Pharisees and scribes. MRK 7 1 b9ul συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 gathered around him "gathered around Jesus" MRK 7 2 b8qw writing-background 0 General Information: In verses verses 3 and 4, the author gives background information about the Pharisees' washing traditions in order to show why the Pharisees were bothered that Jesus' disciples did not wash their hands before eating. This information can be reordered in order to make it easier to understand, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ MRK 7 36 eb2y figs-ellipsis ὅσον ... αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, MRK 7 36 zce7 μᾶλλον περισσότερον 1 the more abundantly "the more widely" or "the more" MRK 7 37 iy76 ὑπέρ περισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 were extremely astonished "were utterly amazed" or "were exceedingly astonished" or "were astonished beyond all measure" MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy 0 the deaf ... the mute These refer to people. Alternate translation: "deaf people ... mute people" or "people who cannot hear ... people who cannot speak" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 08 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Bread
When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### "Adulterous generation"

When Jesus called the people an "adulterous generation," he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it" ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)).
+MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 08 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Bread
When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### "Adulterous generation"

When Jesus called the people an "adulterous generation," he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it" ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)).
MRK 8 1 sgv6 0 Connecting Statement: A great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place. MRK 8 1 rmd8 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In those days This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 8 2 h8v8 0 they continue to be with me already for three days and have nothing to eat "this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat" @@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ MRK 8 38 s5tm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου MRK 8 38 xd58 ὅταν ἔλθῃ 1 when he comes "when he comes back" MRK 8 38 vl69 ἐν τῇ ... δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the glory of his Father When Jesus returns he will have the same glory as his Father. MRK 8 38 vqk3 μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων 1 with the holy angels "accompanied by the holy angels" -MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 09 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "transfigured"

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus' clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, "If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off" ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all" ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)).
+MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "transfigured"

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus' clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, "If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off" ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all" ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)).
MRK 9 1 mt8p 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus has just been talking to the people and his disciples about following him. Six days later, Jesus goes with three of his disciples up a mountain where his appearance temporarily changes to what he will look like one day in the kingdom of God. MRK 9 1 q4b6 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 He said to them "Jesus said to his disciples" MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-metonymy τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The kingdom of God coming represents God showing himself as king. Alternate translation: "God show himself with great power as king" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ MRK 9 50 rb7r ἄναλον γένηται 1 its saltiness "its salty taste" MRK 9 50 fqb8 figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε 1 how can you make it salty again? This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: "you cannot make it salty again." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 9 50 t76n ἀρτύσετε 1 salty again "taste salty again" MRK 9 50 f34y figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Have salt among yourselves Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were salt that people possess. Alternate translation: "Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 10:7-8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Jesus' teaching about divorce

The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage to show that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of "the cup which I will drink," he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant" ([Mark 10:43](../../mrk/10/43.md)).
+MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 10:7-8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Jesus' teaching about divorce

The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage to show that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of "the cup which I will drink," he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, "Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant" ([Mark 10:43](../../mrk/10/43.md)).
MRK 10 1 vf86 0 Connecting Statement: After Jesus and his disciples leave Capernaum, Jesus reminds the Pharisees, as well as his disciples, what God really expects in marriage and divorce. MRK 10 1 qq93 figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς 1 Jesus left that place Jesus' disciples were traveling with him. They were leaving Capernaum. Alternate translation: "Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 10 1 j5wa καὶ ... πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 and to the area beyond the Jordan River "and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River" or "and to the area east of the Jordan River" @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ MRK 10 51 i5an ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ 1 answered him "answered the b MRK 10 51 dap1 ἀναβλέψω 1 to receive my sight "to be able to see" MRK 10 52 s5d2 figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has healed you This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man's faith. Jesus heals the man because he believes that Jesus can heal him. This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "I am healing you because you believed in me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 10 52 ub7w ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him "he followed Jesus" -MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
+MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 11:9-10, 17, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))
MRK 11 1 ch4j 0 Now as they came to Jerusalem ... Bethphage and Bethany, at the Mount of Olives "When Jesus and his disciples came near to Jerusalem, they came to Bethphage and Bethany near the Mount of Olives" They have come to Bethphage and Bethany in the vicinity of Jerusalem. MRK 11 1 g1fy translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage This is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 11 2 bi22 τὴν ... κατέναντι ὑμῶν 1 opposite us "ahead of us" @@ -976,7 +976,7 @@ MRK 11 32 v2gs ἐξ‘ ἀνθρώπων 1 From men "From people" MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ‘ ἀνθρώπων 1 But if we say, 'From men,' ... . The religious leaders imply that they will suffer from the people if they give this answer. Alternate translation: "But if we say, 'From men,' that would not be good." or "But we do not want to say that it was from men." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 11 32 z998 figs-explicit ἐφοβοῦντο( τὸν ὄχλον 1 They were afraid of the people The author, Mark, explains why the religious leaders did not want to say that John's baptism was from men. This can be stated clearly. "They said this to each other because they were afraid of the people" or "They did not want to say that John's baptism was from men because they were afraid of the people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 11 33 us4a figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 We do not know This refers to the baptism of John. This understood information may be supplied. Alternate translation: "We do not know where the baptism of John came from" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Hypothetical Situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hypothetical Situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so they learn what their hearers think is good and bad or right and wrong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
MRK 12 1 w2hb figs-parables 0 Jesus speaks this parable against the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MRK 12 1 qa93 0 Then Jesus began to teach them The word "them" here refers to the chief priests, the scribes, and the elders to whom Jesus had been talking in the previous chapter. MRK 12 1 qap8 0 put a hedge around it He put a barrier around the vineyard. It could have been a row of shrubs, a fence, or a stone wall. @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ MRK 12 43 n8z5 πάντων ... τῶν βαλλόντων εἰς 1 all of the MRK 12 44 ui9a τοῦ περισσεύοντος 1 abundance much wealth, many valuable things MRK 12 44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 her poverty "lack" or "the little she had" MRK 12 44 p3as 0 to live on "to survive on" -MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
+MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time.
MRK 13 1 rrv1 0 General Information: As they leave the temple area, Jesus tells his disciples what will happen in the future to the wonderful temple that Herod the Great has built. MRK 13 1 ql81 figs-explicit 0 the wonderful stones and wonderful buildings The "stones" refer to the stones that the buildings were built with. Alternate translation: "the wonderful buildings and the wonderful stones that they are made of" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς? οὐ μὴ ... λίθος 1 Do you see these great buildings? Not one stone This question is used to draw attention to the buildings. This can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: "Look at these great buildings! Not one stone" or "You see these great buildings now, but not one stone" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1190,7 +1190,7 @@ MRK 13 34 a8ku 0 each one with his work "telling each one what work he should MRK 13 35 z7wi 0 it could be in the evening "he could return in the evening" MRK 13 35 s8j9 ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 rooster crows The rooster is a bird that "crows" very early in the morning by making a loud call. MRK 13 36 mh8t figs-metaphor εὕρῃ ὑμᾶς καθεύδοντας 1 find you sleeping Here Jesus speaks of not being ready as "sleeping." Alternate translation: "find you not ready for his return" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The eating of the body and blood

[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Abba, Father

"Abba" is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The eating of the body and blood

[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father

"Abba" is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
MRK 14 1 hwb4 0 Connecting Statement: Just two days before the Passover, the chief priests and scribes are secretly plotting to kill Jesus. MRK 14 1 gd33 ἐν δόλῳ 1 stealthily without people noticing MRK 14 2 em4q ἔλεγον γάρ 1 For they were saying The word "they" refers to the chief priests and the scribes. @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ MRK 14 71 ce6r figs-idiom 0 to put himself under curses If in your language you MRK 14 72 i7u2 εὐθὺς ... ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν 1 rooster immediately crowed The rooster is a bird that calls out very early in the morning. The loud sound he makes is "crowing." MRK 14 72 ja3e translate-ordinal δευτέρου 1 a second time "Second" here is an ordinal number. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MRK 14 72 zr4p figs-idiom ἐπιβαλὼν 1 he broke down This idiom means that he was overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. Alternate translation: "he was overwhelmed with grief" or "he lost control of his emotions" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 15 intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The curtain of the temple was split in two"

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus' people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Sarcasm

Both by pretending to worship Jesus ([Mark 15:19](../../mrk/15/19.md)) and by pretending to speak to a king ([Mark 15:18](../../mrk/15/18.md)), the soldiers and the Jews showed that they hated Jesus and did not believe that he was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?
This is a phrase in Aramaic. Mark transliterates its sounds by writing them using Greek letters. He then explains its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+MRK 15 intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The curtain of the temple was split in two"

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus' people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

Both by pretending to worship Jesus ([Mark 15:19](../../mrk/15/19.md)) and by pretending to speak to a king ([Mark 15:18](../../mrk/15/18.md)), the soldiers and the Jews showed that they hated Jesus and did not believe that he was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?
This is a phrase in Aramaic. Mark transliterates its sounds by writing them using Greek letters. He then explains its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
MRK 15 1 mps2 0 Connecting Statement: When the chief priests, the elders, the scribes, and the council gave Jesus over to Pilate, they accused Jesus of doing many bad things. When Pilate asked if what they said was true, Jesus did not answer him. MRK 15 1 xz7c figs-metonymy 0 they bound Jesus and led him away They commanded for Jesus to be bound, but it would have been the guards who actually bound him and led him away. Alternate translation: "they commanded for Jesus to be bound and then he was led away" or "they commanded the guards to bind Jesus and then they led him away" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 15 1 v2yf 0 They handed him over to Pilate They had Jesus led to Pilate and transferred control of Jesus over to him. @@ -1430,7 +1430,7 @@ MRK 15 46 g9hf figs-activepassive μνήματι ὃ ἦν λελατομημέ MRK 15 46 bw4k λίθον ἐπὶ 1 a stone against "a huge flat stone in front of" MRK 15 47 m782 translate-names Ἰωσῆτος 1 Joses This Joses was not that same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in [Mark 6:3](../06/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 47 v3wu figs-activepassive 0 the place where Jesus was buried This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the place where Joseph and the others buried Jesus' body" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
MRK 16 1 cw1b 0 Connecting Statement: On the first day of the week, women come early because they expect to use spices to anoint Jesus' body. They are surprised to see a young man who tells them Jesus is alive, but they are afraid and do not tell anyone. MRK 16 1 p61n διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 When the Sabbath day was over That is, after the Sabbath, the seventh day of the week, had ended and the first day of the week had begun. MRK 16 4 kld9 figs-activepassive ἀποκεκύλισται ὁ λίθος 1 the stone had been rolled away This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "someone had rolled away the stone" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index dec3a5ce4..f029112f2 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Luke

1. Introduction and purpose for writing (1:1-–4)
1. Birth of Jesus and his preparation for his ministry (1:5-–4:13)
1. Jesus' ministry in Galilee (4:14–-9:50)
1. Jesus' journey to Jerusalem
- Discipleship (9:51–-11:13)
- Conflict and Jesus' grief (11:14–-14:35)
- Parables about things that are lost and found. Parables about honesty and dishonesty (15:1–-16:31)
- Kingdom of God (17:1–-19:27)
- Jesus' entry into Jerusalem (19:28–-44)
1. Jesus in Jerusalem (19:45–-21:4)
1. Jesus' teaching about his second coming (21:5–-36)
1. Jesus' death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–-24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain of what is true. However, Luke expected the gospel to encourage all believers, not just Theophilus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "The Gospel of Luke" or "The Gospel according to Luke." Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, for example, "The Good News about Jesus that Luke wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of the author. The same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts. In parts of the Book of Acts, the author uses the word "we." This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought Luke was the author of both the Book of Luke and the Book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he said that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus' life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus' final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus' final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word "synoptic" means to "see together."

The texts are considered "parallel" when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the "Son of Man"?

In the gospels, Jesus called himself the "Son of Man." It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a "son of man." That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus' time did not use "Son of Man" as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title "Son of Man" can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as "The Human One." It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Luke?

The following verses are not in the earliest manuscripts. The ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not.

* "Then an angel from heaven appeared to him, strengthening him. Being in agony, he prayed more earnestly, and his sweat became like great drops of blood falling down upon the ground." (22:43–44)
* "Jesus said, "Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing." (23:34)

The following verse is not included in many modern versions. Some versions put it into square brackets. Translators are advised not to translate this verse. However, if in the translators' region, there are older versions of the Bible that include this verse, the translators can include it. If they are translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it was probably not original to Luke's Gospel.

* "For he was required to release one prisoner during the feast" (23:17)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:46-55, 68-79.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "He will be called John"

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

Luke's language is simple and straightforward. He does not use many figures of speech.
+LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:46-55, 68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "He will be called John"

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

Luke's language is simple and straightforward. He does not use many figures of speech.
LUK 1 1 br8r 0 General Information: Luke explains why he writes to Theophilus. LUK 1 1 qhd9 περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 of the things that have been fulfilled among us "about those things that have happened among us" or "about those events that have happened among us" LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-inclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us No one knows for sure who Theophilus was. If he was a Christian, the word "us" here would include him and so be inclusive, and if not, it would be exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ LUK 1 80 eh9j ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 was in the wilderness "li LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως 1 until This does not necessarily mark a stopping point. John continued to live out in the desert even after he started preaching publicly. LUK 1 80 s1nm ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance "when he began to preach in public" LUK 1 80 ie4l ἡμέρας 1 the day This is used here in the general sense of "the time" or "the occasion." -LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:14, 29-32.
+LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:14, 29-32.
LUK 2 1 u9xq 0 General Information: This gives background to show why Mary and Joseph have to move at the time of Jesus' birth. LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This word marks the beginning of a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 2 1 e9m5 0 it came about that This phrase is used to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that. Some versions do not include this phrase. @@ -371,7 +371,7 @@ LUK 2 51 zl2q ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖς 1 was obedient t LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metonymy διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 treasured all these things in her heart Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's mind or inner being. Alternate translation: "carefully remembered all these things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 52 gb25 προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 grow in wisdom and stature "become wiser and stronger." These refer to mental and physical growth. LUK 2 52 y5qk 0 increased in favor with God and people This refers to spiritual and social growth. These could be stated separately. Alternate translation: "God blessed him more and more, and people liked him more and more" -LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Justice
John's instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in this chapter are not complicated. They are things that should have been obvious to them. He instructed them to live justly. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [Luke 3:12-15](./12.md))

#### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list which records a person's ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king's authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy of Isaiah is an extended metaphor describing the ministry of John the Baptist ([Luke 3:4-6](./04.md)). Translation is difficult. It is suggested that the translator treat each line of the ULT as a separate metaphor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "(Herod) had John locked up in prison"
This event can cause confusion because the author says John was imprisoned and then says he was baptizing Jesus. The author probably uses this phrase in anticipation of Herod's imprisonment of John. This would mean that this statement is still in the future at the time of the narrative.
+LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice
John's instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in this chapter are not complicated. They are things that should have been obvious to them. He instructed them to live justly. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [Luke 3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy
A genealogy is a list which records a person's ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king's authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy of Isaiah is an extended metaphor describing the ministry of John the Baptist ([Luke 3:4-6](./04.md)). Translation is difficult. It is suggested that the translator treat each line of the ULT as a separate metaphor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "(Herod) had John locked up in prison"
This event can cause confusion because the author says John was imprisoned and then says he was baptizing Jesus. The author probably uses this phrase in anticipation of Herod's imprisonment of John. This would mean that this statement is still in the future at the time of the narrative.
LUK 3 1 rk9i 0 General Information: These verses give background information to tell what is happening when Jesus' cousin John begins his ministry. LUK 3 1 m1zu 0 Connecting Statement: As the prophet Isaiah had foretold, John begins to preach good news to the people. LUK 3 1 v22w translate-names 0 Philip ... Lysanias These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -458,7 +458,7 @@ LUK 3 36 xit8 translate-names τοῦ Καϊνὰμ, τοῦ Ἀρφαξὰδ, LUK 3 37 qev8 translate-names τοῦ Μαθουσαλὰ, τοῦ Ἑνὼχ, τοῦ Ἰάρετ, τοῦ Μαλελεὴλ, τοῦ Καϊνὰμ 1 the son of Methuselah ... Cainan This is a continuation of the list of Jesus' ancestors that began in [Luke 3:23](./23.md). Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ni8x translate-names τοῦ Ἐνὼς, τοῦ Σὴθ, τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the son of Enos ... Adam This is a continuation of the list of Jesus' ancestors that began in [Luke 3:23](./23.md). Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ck3f Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Adam, the son of God "Adam, created by God" or "Adam, who was from God" or "Adam, the son, we could say, of God" -LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11, 18-19, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Jesus was tempted by the devil
While it is true that the devil sincerely believed that he could persuade Jesus to obey him, it is important not to imply that Jesus actually ever really wanted to obey him.
+LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11, 18-19, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Jesus was tempted by the devil
While it is true that the devil sincerely believed that he could persuade Jesus to obey him, it is important not to imply that Jesus actually ever really wanted to obey him.
LUK 4 1 j249 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus fasts for 40 days, and the devil meets him to try to persuade him to sin. LUK 4 1 n1xx writing-newevent Ἰησοῦς δὲ 1 Then Jesus After John had baptized Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 1 v18k figs-activepassive ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 was led by the Spirit This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Spirit led him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ LUK 4 42 d1pr ἔρημον τόπον 1 a solitary place "a deserted place" or LUK 4 43 sjy1 ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to many other cities "to the people in many other cities" LUK 4 43 b45z figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην 1 this is the reason I was sent here This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "this is the reason God sent me here" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 44 s5mb τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Judea Since Jesus had been in Galilee, the term "Judea" here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: "where the Jews lived" -LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "You will catch men"

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Sinners

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

#### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Hypothetical Situation

Jesus uses a hypothetical situation to condemn the Pharisees. This passage includes "people in good health" and "righteous people." This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. There are no "righteous people," everybody needs Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]] and [Luke 5:31-32](./31.md))

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter the author left some information implicit that his original readers would have understood and thought about. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that the author was communicating. The UST often shows how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand those passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Past Events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened.

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 5:24](../../luk/05/24.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "You will catch men"

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call "sinners," he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as "sinners." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hypothetical Situation

Jesus uses a hypothetical situation to condemn the Pharisees. This passage includes "people in good health" and "righteous people." This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. There are no "righteous people," everybody needs Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]] and [Luke 5:31-32](./31.md))

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter the author left some information implicit that his original readers would have understood and thought about. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that the author was communicating. The UST often shows how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand those passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past Events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened.

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 5:24](../../luk/05/24.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 5 1 l5gy 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus preaches from Simon Peter's boat at the lake of Gennesaret. LUK 5 1 zc8q writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 1 wsf8 ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 listening to the word of God Possible meanings are 1) "listening to the message God wanted them to hear" or 2) "listening to Jesus' message about God" @@ -676,7 +676,7 @@ LUK 5 37 dw18 figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἐκχυθήσεται 1 the wine LUK 5 38 ijm3 ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 1 fresh wineskins "new wineskins" or "new wine bags." This refers to new wineskins, unused. LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 drinking old wine ... wants the new This metaphor contrasts the old teaching of the religious leaders against the new teaching of Jesus. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not willing to listen to the new things that Jesus is teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 5 39 uan9 figs-explicit λέγει γάρ, ὁ‘ παλαιὸς χρηστός ἐστιν 1 for he says, 'The old is better.' It may be helpful to add: "and he is therefore not willing to try the new wine" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Luke 6:20-49 contains many blessings and woes that appear to correspond to Matthew 5-7. This part of Matthew has traditionally been called the "Sermon on the Mount." In Luke, they are not as connected to a teaching on the kingdom of God as they are in Matthew's gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Eating the grain"

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath ([Luke 6:1](../../luk/06/01.md)), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain and so disobeying God's command to rest and not work on the Sabbath.

The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses required farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. Jesus used a metaphor of a generous grain merchant to teach his people to be generous ([Luke 6:38](../../luk/06/38.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Rhetorical Questions

Rhetorical questions are questions to which the speaker already knows the answer. The Pharisees scolded Jesus by asking him a rhetorical question when they thought he was breaking the Sabbath ([Luke 6:2](../../luk/06/02.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Luke wrote that the disciples were rubbing the heads of grain between their hands, he expected his reader to know that they were separating the part they would eat from what they would throw away ([Luke 6:1](../../luk/06/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.
+LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Luke 6:20-49 contains many blessings and woes that appear to correspond to Matthew 5-7. This part of Matthew has traditionally been called the "Sermon on the Mount." In Luke, they are not as connected to a teaching on the kingdom of God as they are in Matthew's gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Eating the grain"

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath ([Luke 6:1](../../luk/06/01.md)), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain and so disobeying God's command to rest and not work on the Sabbath.

The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses required farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Metaphors are pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. Jesus used a metaphor of a generous grain merchant to teach his people to be generous ([Luke 6:38](../../luk/06/38.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical Questions

Rhetorical questions are questions to which the speaker already knows the answer. The Pharisees scolded Jesus by asking him a rhetorical question when they thought he was breaking the Sabbath ([Luke 6:2](../../luk/06/02.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Luke wrote that the disciples were rubbing the heads of grain between their hands, he expected his reader to know that they were separating the part they would eat from what they would throw away ([Luke 6:1](../../luk/06/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.
LUK 6 1 dum1 figs-you 0 General Information: The word "you" here is plural, and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 6 1 sw1e 0 Connecting Statement: While Jesus and his disciples are walking through grainfields, some Pharisees begin to question the disciples about what they are doing on the Sabbath, which, in God's law, has been set aside for God. LUK 6 1 c4sa writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you can consider using it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -817,7 +817,7 @@ LUK 6 49 l5jj ποταμός 1 torrent of water "fast-moving water" or "river" LUK 6 49 bs8c προσέρρηξεν 1 flowed against "crashed against" LUK 6 49 q98t συνέπεσεν 1 collapsed fell down or came apart LUK 6 49 jm86 ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα 1 the ruin of that house was complete "that house was completely destroyed" -LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

Several times in this chapter Luke changes his topic without marking the change. You should not try to make these rough changes smooth.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Centurion

The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave ([Luke 7:2](../../luk/07/02.md) was doing many unusual things. A Roman soldier would almost never go to a Jew for anything, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### John's Baptism

John baptized people to show that those he was baptizing knew they were sinners and were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

#### "Sinners"

Luke refers to a group of people as "sinners." The Jewish leaders considered these people to be hopelessly ignorant of the law of Moses, and so called them "sinners." In reality, the leaders were sinful. This situation can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

#### "Feet"

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty and muddy. Only slaves washed other people's feet. The woman who washed Jesus' feet was showing him great honor.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 7:34](../../luk/07/34.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

Several times in this chapter Luke changes his topic without marking the change. You should not try to make these rough changes smooth.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave ([Luke 7:2](../../luk/07/02.md) was doing many unusual things. A Roman soldier would almost never go to a Jew for anything, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John's Baptism

John baptized people to show that those he was baptizing knew they were sinners and were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### "Sinners"

Luke refers to a group of people as "sinners." The Jewish leaders considered these people to be hopelessly ignorant of the law of Moses, and so called them "sinners." In reality, the leaders were sinful. This situation can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### "Feet"

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty and muddy. Only slaves washed other people's feet. The woman who washed Jesus' feet was showing him great honor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 7:34](../../luk/07/34.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 7 1 e1by 0 General Information: Jesus enters Capernaum where Jesus heals a centurian's servant. LUK 7 1 zi6w figs-idiom εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in the hearing of the people The idiom "in the hearing" emphasizes that he wanted them to hear what he said. Alternate translation: "to the people who were listening to him" or "to the people who were present" or "for the people to hear" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 1 l2zp writing-newevent εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 he entered Capernaum This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ LUK 7 49 enw4 συνανακείμενοι 1 reclining together "reclining toge LUK 7 49 ie4z figs-rquestion τίς οὗτός ἐστιν ὃς καὶ ἁμαρτίας ἀφίησιν 1 Who is this that even forgives sins? The religious leaders knew that only God could forgive sins and did not believe that Jesus was God. This question was probably intended to be an accusation. Alternate translation: "Who does this man think he is? Only God can forgive sins!" or "Why is this man pretending to be God, who alone can forgive sins?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 7 50 lje8 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you "Because of your faith, you are saved." The abstract noun "faith" could be stated as an action. Alternate translation: "Because you believe, you are saved" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 7 50 sp2u πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This is a way of saying good-bye while giving a blessing at the same time. Alternate translation: "As you go, do not worry anymore" or "May God give you peace as you go" -LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Several times in this chapter Luke changes his topic without marking the change. You should not try to make these rough changes smooth.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Miracles

Jesus made a storm stop by speaking to it, he made a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he made evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Luke 8:4-15](./04.md)).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
+LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Several times in this chapter Luke changes his topic without marking the change. You should not try to make these rough changes smooth.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

Jesus made a storm stop by speaking to it, he made a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he made evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([Luke 8:4-15](./04.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents "brother" and "sister" and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents "brother" and "sister." In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])
LUK 8 1 f72n 0 General Information: These verses give background information about Jesus' preaching while traveling. LUK 8 1 i6mi writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 It happened This phrase is used here to mark a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 8 2 g99l figs-activepassive αἳ ἦσαν τεθεραπευμέναι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν καὶ ἀσθενειῶν 1 who had been healed of evil spirits and diseases This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom Jesus had set free from evil spirits and healed of diseases" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1097,7 +1097,7 @@ LUK 8 53 nu8w κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ, εἰδότες ὅτι ἀπέ LUK 8 54 e7zt αὐτὸς ... κρατήσας τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς 1 he took her by the hand "Jesus took hold of the girl's hand" LUK 8 55 k6w2 figs-explicit ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῆς 1 Her spirit returned "Her spirit returned to her body." The Jews understood that life was the result of the spirit coming into a person. Alternate translation: "She started breathing again" or "She came back to life" or "She became alive again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 56 c6mp μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν 1 to tell no one This could be stated differently. Alternate translation: "not to tell anyone" -LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 09 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "To preach the kingdom of God"

No one knows for sure what the words "kingdom of God" here refer to. Some say it refers to the reign of God on earth, and others say it refers to the gospel message that Jesus died to pay for the his people's sins. It is best to translate this as "to preach about the kingdom of God" or "to teach them about how God was going to show himself as king." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came, so some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah ([Luke 9:9](../../luk/09/09.md), [Luke 9:19](../../luk/09/19.md)). However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus ([Luke 9:30](../../luk/09/30.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

#### "Kingdom of God"

The term "kingdom of God" is used in this chapter to refer to a kingdom that was still in the future when the words were spoken. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

#### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus' clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. An example in this chapter is: "Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it." ([Luke 9:24](../../luk/09/24.md)).

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 9:22](../../luk/09/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

#### "Receiving"

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, "If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me" ([Luke 9:48](../../luk/09/48.md)), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, "the people there did not receive him" ([Luke 9:53](../../luk/09/53.md)), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
+LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "To preach the kingdom of God"

No one knows for sure what the words "kingdom of God" here refer to. Some say it refers to the reign of God on earth, and others say it refers to the gospel message that Jesus died to pay for the his people's sins. It is best to translate this as "to preach about the kingdom of God" or "to teach them about how God was going to show himself as king." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came, so some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah ([Luke 9:9](../../luk/09/09.md), [Luke 9:19](../../luk/09/19.md)). However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus ([Luke 9:30](../../luk/09/30.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

### "Kingdom of God"

The term "kingdom of God" is used in this chapter to refer to a kingdom that was still in the future when the words were spoken. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus' clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God's Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. An example in this chapter is: "Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it." ([Luke 9:24](../../luk/09/24.md)).

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 9:22](../../luk/09/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### "Receiving"

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, "If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me" ([Luke 9:48](../../luk/09/48.md)), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, "the people there did not receive him" ([Luke 9:53](../../luk/09/53.md)), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
LUK 9 1 s7fw 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus reminds his disciples not to depend on money and their things, gives them power, and then sends them out to various places. LUK 9 1 zqq6 δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν 1 power and authority These two terms are used together to show that the twelve had both the ability and the right to heal people. Translate this phrase with a combination of words that include both of these ideas. LUK 9 1 fuj7 πάντα τὰ δαιμόνια 1 all the demons Possible meanings are 1) "every demon" or 2) "every kind of demon." @@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ LUK 9 62 j8xt writing-proverbs 0 No one ... fit for the kingdom of God Jesus re LUK 9 62 zdz4 figs-idiom οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one who puts his hand to the plow Here "puts his hand to" something is an idiom that means the person starts to do something. Alternate translation: "No one who starts to plow his field" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 62 pv99 βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 looks back Anyone who is looking back while plowing cannot guide the plow where it needs to go. That person must focus on looking forward in order to plow well. LUK 9 62 k2kn εὔθετός ... τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 fit for the kingdom of God "useful for the kingdom of God" or "suitable for the kingdom of God" -LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God's kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### Neighbor

A neighbor is anyone who lives nearby. The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a parable ([Luke 10:29-36](./29.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God's kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Neighbor

A neighbor is anyone who lives nearby. The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a parable ([Luke 10:29-36](./29.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
LUK 10 1 c5vi 0 General Information: Jesus sends out 70 more people ahead of him. Those 70 return with joy, and Jesus responds with praise to his heavenly Father. LUK 10 1 u8l6 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 10 1 m75c translate-numbers ἑβδομήκοντα 1 seventy "70." Some versions say "seventy-two" or "72." You may want to include a footnote that says that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) @@ -1369,7 +1369,7 @@ LUK 10 40 jd9a figs-rquestion 0 do you not care ... alone? Martha is complainin LUK 10 41 dsw3 Μάρθα, Μάρθα 1 Martha, Martha Jesus repeats Martha's name for emphasis. Alternate translation: "Dear Martha" or "You, Martha" LUK 10 42 hqt4 figs-explicit 0 only one thing is necessary Jesus is contrasting what Mary is doing with what Martha is doing. It may be helpful to make this explicit. Alternate translation: "the only thing that is really necessary is to listen to my teaching" or "listening to my teaching is more necessary than preparing a meal" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 42 nzn8 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς 1 which will not be taken away from her Possible meanings are 1) "I will not take this opportunity away from her" or 2) "she will not lose what she has gained as she was listening to me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The ULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The Lord's Prayer

When Jesus' followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.

#### Jonah

Jonah was an Old Testament prophet who was sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell them to repent. When he told them to repent, they repented. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Washing

The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash these things, but they would wash them anyway. This was because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that God had not made, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
+LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The ULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Lord's Prayer

When Jesus' followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.

### Jonah

Jonah was an Old Testament prophet who was sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell them to repent. When he told them to repent, they repented. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Washing

The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash these things, but they would wash them anyway. This was because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that God had not made, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])
LUK 11 1 rkn4 0 General Information: The is the beginning of the next part of the story. Jesus teaches his disciples to pray. LUK 11 1 fl3j writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 It happened This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 11 1 c9n4 0 when Jesus was praying ... one of It may be more natural to state that Jesus finished praying before the disciple asked the question. Alternate translation: "that Jesus was praying in a certain place. When he finished praying, one of" @@ -1525,7 +1525,7 @@ LUK 11 53 mld3 0 General Information: This is the end of the part of the story LUK 11 53 ejf1 κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ 1 After Jesus left there "After Jesus left the Pharisee's house" LUK 11 53 h9sw ἀποστοματίζειν αὐτὸν περὶ πλειόνων 1 argued with him about many things The scribes and Pharisees did not argue in order to defend their views, but to try to trap Jesus so they could accuse him of breaking the law of God. LUK 11 54 mr32 figs-metaphor 0 trying to trap him in his own words This means they wanted Jesus to say something wrong so that they could accuse him. The scribes and Pharisees did not argue in order to defend their views, but to try to trap Jesus so they could accuse him of breaking the law of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

#### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

#### Division

Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them ([Luke 12:51-56](./51.md)).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 12;8](./08.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Blasphemy against the Spirit"

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit's work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### Division

Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them ([Luke 12:51-56](./51.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 12;8](./08.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 12 1 w6x5 0 General Information: Jesus begins to teach his disciples in front of thousands of people. LUK 12 1 en8g writing-newevent ἐν οἷς 1 In the meantime This is probably while the scribes and Pharisees were looking for a way to trap him. The author uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 12 1 r5jz writing-background 0 when many thousands of the people ... they trampled on each other This is background information that tells the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1685,7 +1685,7 @@ LUK 12 58 e7hz τὸν κριτήν 1 the judge This refers to the magistrate, LUK 12 58 b7sh 0 does not deliver you "does not take you" LUK 12 59 wi7m figs-hypo 0 I say to you ... bit of money This is the end of the hypothetical situation, which begins in verse 58, that Jesus uses to teach the crowd. His point is that they should resolve the things they are able to resolve without involving the public courts. This can be restated to make it clear it might not happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 12 59 i124 τὸ ἔσχατον λεπτὸν 1 the very last bit of money "the entire amount of money that your adversary demands" -LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes
### Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Unknown events

The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written ([Luke 13:1-5](./01.md)). Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last" ([Luke 13:30](../../luk/13/30.md)).
+LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown events

The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written ([Luke 13:1-5](./01.md)). Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last" ([Luke 13:30](../../luk/13/30.md)).
LUK 13 1 t1fi 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus is still speaking in front of the crowd. Some people in the crowd ask him a question and he begins to respond. This continues the story that begins in [Luke 12:1](../12/01.md). LUK 13 1 b9rx ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This phrase connects this event to the end of chapter 12, when Jesus was teaching a crowd of people. LUK 13 1 wg2k figs-explicit ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate mixed with their own sacrifices Here "blood" refers to the death of the Galileans. They were probably killed while they were offering their sacrifices. This could be stated explicitly as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1784,7 +1784,7 @@ LUK 13 34 kb9t figs-metaphor 0 the way a hen gathers her brood under her wings LUK 13 35 w1v2 figs-metaphor ἀφίεται ... ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house is abandoned This is a prophecy about something that would happen soon. It means that God has stopped protecting the people of Jerusalem, so enemies can attack them and drive them away. Possible meanings are 1) God will abandon them. Alternate translation: "God will abandon you" or 2) their city will be empty. Alternate translation: "your house will be abandoned" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 35 x4y6 ὑμῖν ... οὐ μὴ με ἴδητέ ἕως ... εἴπητε 1 you will not see me until you say "you will not see me until the time comes when you will say" or "the next time you see me, you will say" LUK 13 35 v6lj figs-metonymy ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here "name" refers to the Lord's power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Verse 3 says, "Jesus asked the experts in the Jewish law and the Pharisees, 'Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath, or not?'" Many times, the Pharisees got angry with Jesus for healing on the Sabbath. In this passage, Jesus dumbfounds the Pharisees. It was normally the Pharisees who tried to trap Jesus.

#### Changes of subject

Many times in this chapter Luke changes from one subject to another without marking the changes.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Parable

Jesus told the parable in [Luke 14:15-24](./15.md) to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy. But people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "for everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted" ([Luke 14:11](../../luk/14/11.md)).
+LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Verse 3 says, "Jesus asked the experts in the Jewish law and the Pharisees, 'Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath, or not?'" Many times, the Pharisees got angry with Jesus for healing on the Sabbath. In this passage, Jesus dumbfounds the Pharisees. It was normally the Pharisees who tried to trap Jesus.

### Changes of subject

Many times in this chapter Luke changes from one subject to another without marking the changes.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parable

Jesus told the parable in [Luke 14:15-24](./15.md) to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy. But people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "for everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted" ([Luke 14:11](../../luk/14/11.md)).
LUK 14 1 a3ya writing-background 0 General Information: It is the Sabbath, and Jesus is at Pharisee's house. Verse 1 gives background information for the event that follows. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 14 1 dj2d writing-newevent ἐγένετο ... Σαββάτῳ 1 It happened one Sabbath This indicates a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 14 1 lh8g figs-synecdoche φαγεῖν ἄρτον 1 to eat bread "to eat" or "for a meal." Bread was an important part of a meal and is used in this sentence to refer to a meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1886,7 +1886,7 @@ LUK 14 35 bp1b κοπρίαν 1 manure pile People use manure to fertilize gard LUK 14 35 n5a9 figs-activepassive ἔξω βάλλουσιν αὐτό 1 It is thrown away This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Someone just throws it away" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 35 u9h3 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 He who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase "ears to hear" here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Luke 8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: "Let the one who is willing to listen, listen" or "The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 35 c5fb figs-123person 0 He who ... let him Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Luke 8:8](../08/08.md). Alternate translation: "If you are willing to listen, listen" or "If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### The parable of the prodigal son

[Luke 15:11-32](./11.md) is the parable of the prodigal son. Most people think that the father in the story represented God (the Father), the sinful younger son represented those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son represented the Pharisees. In the story the older son became angry at the father because the father forgave the younger son's sins, and he would not go into the party the father had because the younger son repented. This was because Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think only they were good and to not forgive other people's sins. He was teaching them that that they would never be part of God's kingdom because they thought that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sinners

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables ([Luke 15:4-7](./04.md), [Luke 15:8-10](./08.md), and [Luke 15:11-32](./11.md)) to teach that the people who believe they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
+LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### The parable of the prodigal son

[Luke 15:11-32](./11.md) is the parable of the prodigal son. Most people think that the father in the story represented God (the Father), the sinful younger son represented those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son represented the Pharisees. In the story the older son became angry at the father because the father forgave the younger son's sins, and he would not go into the party the father had because the younger son repented. This was because Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think only they were good and to not forgive other people's sins. He was teaching them that that they would never be part of God's kingdom because they thought that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus' time spoke of "sinners," they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables ([Luke 15:4-7](./04.md), [Luke 15:8-10](./08.md), and [Luke 15:11-32](./11.md)) to teach that the people who believe they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])
LUK 15 1 l9ez 0 General Information: We do not know where this takes place; it simply occurs one day when Jesus is teaching. LUK 15 1 yj6b writing-newevent 0 Now This marks the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 15 1 ss52 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ τελῶναι 1 all the tax collectors This is an exaggeration to stress that there were very many of them. Alternate translation: "many tax collectors" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ LUK 16 30 r3ez ἀπὸ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy εἰ‘ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets Here "Moses and the prophets" represent the things that they wrote. Alternate translation: "If they do not pay attention to what Moses and the prophets wrote" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 31 n9s4 figs-hypo οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 neither will they be persuaded if someone rises from the dead Abraham states what would happen if the hypothetical situation occurred. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "neither will a person who comes back from the dead be able to convince them" or "they will not believe even if a person comes back from the dead" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 31 gf1b ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ 1 rises from the dead The words "from the dead" speak of all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from among them is to become alive again. -LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Old Testament Examples

Jesus used the lives of Noah and of Lot to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and they needed to be ready for him to return, because he would not warn them when he came. Lot's wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it, and they needed to love Jesus more than anything else,

Those who read your translation may need help so they can understand what Jesus was teaching here.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Hypothetical situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. Jesus used a special type of hypothetical situation to teach that what will happen to those who cause others to sin will be worse than being drowned ([Luke 19:1-2](./01.md)) and another to scold the disciples because they had little faith ([Luke 19:6](../../luk/19/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

#### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus asked his disciples three questions ([Luke 17:7-9](./07.md)) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 17:22](../../luk/17/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it" ([Luke 17:33](../../luk/17/33.md)).
+LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old Testament Examples

Jesus used the lives of Noah and of Lot to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and they needed to be ready for him to return, because he would not warn them when he came. Lot's wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it, and they needed to love Jesus more than anything else,

Those who read your translation may need help so they can understand what Jesus was teaching here.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hypothetical situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. Jesus used a special type of hypothetical situation to teach that what will happen to those who cause others to sin will be worse than being drowned ([Luke 19:1-2](./01.md)) and another to scold the disciples because they had little faith ([Luke 19:6](../../luk/19/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus asked his disciples three questions ([Luke 17:7-9](./07.md)) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 17:22](../../luk/17/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in this chapter: "Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it" ([Luke 17:33](../../luk/17/33.md)).
LUK 17 1 ls87 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues teaching, but he directs his attention back to his disciples. This is still the same part of the story and the same day that began in [Luke 15:3](../15/03.md). LUK 17 1 ej1e 0 It is certain there will be things that can cause us to sin "Things that tempt people to sin will certainly happen" LUK 17 1 zck5 0 to that person through whom they come "to anyone who causes the temptations to come" or "to any person who causes people to be tempted" @@ -2178,7 +2178,7 @@ LUK 17 37 c54n 0 General Information: The disciples ask Jesus a question about LUK 17 37 wmg6 ποῦ, Κύριε 1 Where, Lord? "Lord, where will this happen?" LUK 17 37 fen1 writing-proverbs 0 Where there is a body, there will the vultures also be gathered together Apparently this is a proverb that means "It will be obvious" or "You will know it when it happens." Alternate translation: "As vultures gathering shows that there is a dead body, so these things show that the Son of Man is coming" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) LUK 17 37 m6ca translate-unknown ἀετοὶ 1 vultures Vultures are large birds that fly together and eat the flesh of dead animals that they find. You could describe these birds this way or use the word for local birds that do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Jesus told two parables ([Luke 18:1-8](./01.md) and [Luke 18:9-14](./09.md)) and then taught that his followers were to be humble ([Luke 18:15-17](./15.md)), to use everything they owned to help the poor ([Luke 18:18-30](./18.md)), and to expect him to die soon ([Luke 18:31-34](./31.md)), Then they all began to walk to Jerusalem, and Jesus healed a blind man ([Luke 18:35-43](./35.md)).

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Judges

People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge unjust. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

#### Pharisees and tax collectors

The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of righteous good people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 18:8](../../luk/18/08.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Jesus told two parables ([Luke 18:1-8](./01.md) and [Luke 18:9-14](./09.md)) and then taught that his followers were to be humble ([Luke 18:15-17](./15.md)), to use everything they owned to help the poor ([Luke 18:18-30](./18.md)), and to expect him to die soon ([Luke 18:31-34](./31.md)), Then they all began to walk to Jerusalem, and Jesus healed a blind man ([Luke 18:35-43](./35.md)).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Judges

People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge unjust. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### Pharisees and tax collectors

The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of righteous good people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 18:8](../../luk/18/08.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 18 1 r26t figs-parables 0 Jesus begins to tell a parable as he continues to teach his disciples. This is the same part of the story that began in [Luke 17:20](../17/20.md). Verse 1 gives us a description of the parable Jesus is about to tell. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 18 1 w7ar ἔλεγεν δὲ 1 Then he "Then Jesus" LUK 18 2 l2qr λέγων 1 saying A new sentence could begin here: "He said" @@ -2293,7 +2293,7 @@ LUK 18 41 al8g ἀναβλέψω 1 to receive my sight "to be able to see" LUK 18 42 n67h figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 Receive your sight This is a command, but Jesus is not commanding the man to do anything. Jesus is healing the man by commanding him to be healed. Alternate translation: "You will now receive your sight" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-metonymy ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has healed you These words are a metonym. It was because of the man's faith that Jesus healed the man. Alternate translation: "I have healed you because you believed in me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 18 43 d1kk δοξάζων τὸν Θεόν 1 glorifying God "giving glory to God" or "praising God" -LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

After Jesus helped a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins ([Luke 19:1-10](./01.md)), he taught his followers that when he began to rule as king they would need to tell them what they had done with the things he had given them to take care of ([Luke 19:11-27](./11.md)). He did this by telling them a parable. After that, he rode into Jerusalem on a colt ([Luke 19:28-48](./28.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Sinner"
The Pharisees refer to a group of people as "sinners." The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

#### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

#### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

#### Spreading garments and branches

When king would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the clothes that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

#### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
+LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

After Jesus helped a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins ([Luke 19:1-10](./01.md)), he taught his followers that when he began to rule as king they would need to tell them what they had done with the things he had given them to take care of ([Luke 19:11-27](./11.md)). He did this by telling them a parable. After that, he rode into Jerusalem on a colt ([Luke 19:28-48](./28.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Sinner"
The Pharisees refer to a group of people as "sinners." The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

### Spreading garments and branches

When king would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the clothes that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
LUK 19 1 j35m writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 1-2 begin to give background information for the events that follow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 19 2 y5i5 writing-participants 0 Behold, there was a man there The word "behold" alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. Alternate translation: "There was a man who was" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 19 2 z91v writing-background αὐτὸς ἦν ἀρχιτελώνης, καὶ ... πλούσιος 1 He was a chief tax collector and was rich This is background information about Zacchaeus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -2421,7 +2421,7 @@ LUK 19 46 ba8w figs-metaphor σπήλαιον‘ λῃστῶν 1 a den of robbe LUK 19 47 mn6e writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of this part of the story. These verses tell about ongoing action that continues after the main part of the story ends. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) LUK 19 47 z2n8 ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple "in the temple courtyard" or "at the temple" LUK 19 48 pnf9 ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων 1 were listening to him intently "were paying close attention to what Jesus was saying" -LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 20:17, 42-43, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Using questions to trap people

When Jesus asked the Pharisees who gave John the authority to baptize ([Luke 20:4](../../luk/20/04.md)), they could not answer because any answer they gave would give someone a reason to say that they were wrong ([Luke 20:5-6](./05.md)). They thought that they would be able to say that Jesus was wrong when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar ([Luke 20:22](../../luk/20/22.md)), but Jesus gave them an answer that they had not thought of.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son "lord," that is, "master." However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants. In this passage, Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will himself be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. ([Luke 20:41-44](./41.md)).
+LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 20:17, 42-43, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Using questions to trap people

When Jesus asked the Pharisees who gave John the authority to baptize ([Luke 20:4](../../luk/20/04.md)), they could not answer because any answer they gave would give someone a reason to say that they were wrong ([Luke 20:5-6](./05.md)). They thought that they would be able to say that Jesus was wrong when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar ([Luke 20:22](../../luk/20/22.md)), but Jesus gave them an answer that they had not thought of.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son "lord," that is, "master." However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants. In this passage, Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will himself be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. ([Luke 20:41-44](./41.md)).
LUK 20 1 idi8 0 Connecting Statement: The chief priests, scribes, and elders question Jesus in the temple. LUK 20 1 h8gv writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 It came about This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 20 1 vtg4 ἐν ... τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple "in the temple courtyard" or "at the temple" @@ -2551,7 +2551,7 @@ LUK 20 46 ang2 figs-explicit τῶν ... θελόντων περιπατεῖν LUK 20 47 c7yv figs-metaphor 0 They also devour widows' houses "They also eat up widows' houses." The scribes are spoken of as if they were hungry animals that eat up the widows' houses. The word "houses" is a synecdoche for both where the widow lives and all the possessions she puts in her home. Alternate translation: "They also take away from widows all their possessions" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 20 47 g67x προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται 1 for a show they make long prayers "they pretend to be righteous and make long prayers" or "they make long prayers so that people will see them" LUK 20 47 zpp5 figs-activepassive οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 Men like this will receive greater condemnation "They will receive a more severe judgment." This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will certainly punish them very severely" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Jesus told his disciples much about what would happen before he returned.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "For many will come in my name, saying, 'I am he,'"

Jesus taught that before he returned many people would falsely claim to be him returning. It will also be a time when many people will hate Jesus' followers and even want to kill them.

#### "Until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled"

The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as "the times of the Gentiles," the time when the Gentiles would rule over the Jews.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 21:27](../../luk/21/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Jesus told his disciples much about what would happen before he returned.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "For many will come in my name, saying, 'I am he,'"

Jesus taught that before he returned many people would falsely claim to be him returning. It will also be a time when many people will hate Jesus' followers and even want to kill them.

### "Until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled"

The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as "the times of the Gentiles," the time when the Gentiles would rule over the Jews.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 21:27](../../luk/21/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 21 1 k2zb writing-background 0 This is the next event in the story. Jesus begins teaching his disciples, either on the same day that the Sadducees question Jesus ([Luke 20:27](../20/27.md)) or on a different day. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 21 1 nf4c figs-explicit τὰ δῶρα 1 gifts You may need to make explicit what the gifts were. Alternate translation: "gifts of money" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 1 unv2 γαζοφυλάκιον 1 treasury one of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money as a gift to God @@ -2666,7 +2666,7 @@ LUK 21 37 x4g8 τὰς ... δὲ νύκτας ἐξερχόμενος 1 at nigh LUK 21 38 mu6l figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 All of the people The word "all" is probably an exaggeration to emphasize that the crowd was very large. Alternate translation: "A very large number of people in the city" or "Almost everyone in the city" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 21 38 bky8 ὤρθριζεν 1 came early in the morning "would come early each morning" LUK 21 38 cbx2 ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 to hear him "to hear him teach" -LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The eating of the body and blood

[Luke 22:19-20](./19.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

#### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 22:22](../../luk/22/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The eating of the body and blood

[Luke 22:19-20](./19.md) describes Jesus' last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate "the Lord's Supper," the "Eucharist", or "Holy Communion" to remember this meal.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 22:22](../../luk/22/22.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
LUK 22 1 cf6p writing-background 0 General Information: Judas agrees to betray Jesus. These verses give background information about this event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 22 1 q8fa writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to introduce a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 22 1 jjy9 figs-explicit ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 Festival of Unleavened Bread The festival was called by this name because during the festival, the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. Alternate translation: "festival when they would eat unleavened bread" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2860,7 +2860,7 @@ LUK 22 70 l4j7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son LUK 22 70 jtr9 ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι 1 You say that I am "Yes, it is just like you say" LUK 22 71 u3m3 figs-rquestion 0 Why do we still need a witness? They use a question for emphasis. Alternate translation: "We have no further need for witnesses!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 22 71 lpm4 figs-metonymy ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 heard from his own mouth The phrase "his own mouth" refers to his speech. Alternate translation: "heard him say that he believes he is the Son of God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The ULT sets the last line of this chapter apart because it is more connected with chapter 24 than with chapter 23.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Accuse

The chief priests and scribes accused Jesus of doing evil because they wanted Pilate to kill Jesus. But they were accusing him falsely, because Jesus had never done what they accused him of doing.

#### "The curtain of the temple was split in two"

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus' people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Luke 23:53](../../luk/23/53.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "I find no fault in this man"

Pilate was saying that he did not know of any reason why he should punish Jesus because Jesus had not broken any laws. Pilate was not saying that Jesus was perfect.
+LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The ULT sets the last line of this chapter apart because it is more connected with chapter 24 than with chapter 23.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Accuse

The chief priests and scribes accused Jesus of doing evil because they wanted Pilate to kill Jesus. But they were accusing him falsely, because Jesus had never done what they accused him of doing.

### "The curtain of the temple was split in two"

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus' people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Luke 23:53](../../luk/23/53.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "I find no fault in this man"

Pilate was saying that he did not know of any reason why he should punish Jesus because Jesus had not broken any laws. Pilate was not saying that Jesus was perfect.
LUK 23 1 pi3d 0 General Information: Jesus is brought before Pilate. LUK 23 1 sgf1 ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν 1 The whole company of them "All of the Jewish leaders" or "All the members of the Council" LUK 23 1 mvn9 ἀναστὰν 1 rose up "stood" or "stood to their feet" @@ -3030,7 +3030,7 @@ LUK 23 56 sm68 ὑποστρέψασαι 1 They returned "The women went to the LUK 23 56 mj6q figs-explicit ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα καὶ μύρα 1 prepared spices and ointments Because they had had no time to honor Jesus by putting fragrant spices and ointments on his body on the day he died, they were going to do it on the morning of the first day of the week. Alternate translation: "prepared spices and ointments to put on Jesus' body" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 56 uzk9 ἡσύχασαν 1 they rested "the women did no work" LUK 23 56 tk6s κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν 1 according to the commandment "according to the Jewish law" or "as the Jewish law required." They were not allowed to prepare his body on the Sabbath according to the law. -LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Luke 24:1](../../luk/24/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

#### The faith of the women

Most of Luke's original readers would have thought of women as less important than men, but Luke carefully shows that some women loved Jesus very much and had more faith than the twelve disciples had.

#### Resurrection

Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38-43](./38.md)).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 24:7](../../luk/24/07.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

#### "On the third day"

Jesus told his followers that he would become alive again "on the third day" ([Luke 18:33](../../luk/18/33.md)). He died on a Friday afternoon (before sunset) and became alive again on a Sunday, so he became alive again "on the third day" because the Jews said that the day began and ended at sunset, and they counted any part of the day as a day. Friday was the first day, Saturday was the second day, and Sunday was the third day.

#### Two men in bright shining robes

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Luke 24:1](../../luk/24/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### The faith of the women

Most of Luke's original readers would have thought of women as less important than men, but Luke carefully shows that some women loved Jesus very much and had more faith than the twelve disciples had.

### Resurrection

Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38-43](./38.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([Luke 24:7](../../luk/24/07.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### "On the third day"

Jesus told his followers that he would become alive again "on the third day" ([Luke 18:33](../../luk/18/33.md)). He died on a Friday afternoon (before sunset) and became alive again on a Sunday, so he became alive again "on the third day" because the Jews said that the day began and ended at sunset, and they counted any part of the day as a day. Friday was the first day, Saturday was the second day, and Sunday was the third day.

### Two men in bright shining robes

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
LUK 24 1 b46u 0 General Information: The women ([Luke 23:55](../23/55.md)) return to the tomb with spices to put on Jesus' body. LUK 24 1 r62f translate-ordinal τῇ ... μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων ... βαθέως 1 Very early on the first day of the week "Before dawn on Sunday" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 24 1 qg7a ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν 1 they came to the tomb "the women arrived at the tomb." These were the women spoken of in [Luke 23:55](../23/55.md). diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index b734be7e8..807133589 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus' death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel "so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God" (20:31).

John's Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.

John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "The Gospel of John" or "The Gospel According to John." Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, "The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus' life?

John wrote much about Jesus' final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus' final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do the words "remain," "reside," and "abide" mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words "remain," "reside", and "abide" as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus' word "remained" in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person "remained" in the other person. Christians are said to "remain" in Christ and in God. The Father is said to "remain" in the Son, and the Son is said to "remain" in the Father. The Son is said to "remain" in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to "remain" in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, "He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him" (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of "will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him." But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, "If my words remain in you" (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, "If you live by my message." Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators' region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John's Gospel.

* "waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had." (5:3-4)
* "going through the midst of them, and so passed by" (8:59)

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John's Gospel.

* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53–8:11)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The Word"

John uses the phrase "the Word" to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God's most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### "Children of God"

When people believes in Jesus, they go from being "children of wrath" to "children of God." They are adopted into the "family of God."They are adopted into the "family of God." This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "In the beginning"

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But "very long ago" is different from "in the beginning," and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The Word"

John uses the phrase "the Word" to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God's most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### "Children of God"

When people believes in Jesus, they go from being "children of wrath" to "children of God." They are adopted into the "family of God."They are adopted into the "family of God." This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "In the beginning"

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But "very long ago" is different from "in the beginning," and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 1 1 er9g ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 In the beginning This refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. JHN 1 1 z59q ὁ λόγος 1 the Word This refers to Jesus. Translate as "the Word" if possible. If "Word" is feminine in your language, it could be translated as "the one who is called the Word." JHN 1 3 gm5g figs-activepassive πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο 1 All things were made through him This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: "God made all things through him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ JHN 1 47 ys8d figs-litotes ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν 1 in whom is JHN 1 49 l666 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 50 p3ma figs-rquestion 0 Because I said to you ... do you believe? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: "You believe because I said, 'I saw you underneath the fig tree'! (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 1 51 ga44 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly Translate this the way your language emphasizes that what follows is important and true. -JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

#### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

#### "He knew what was in man"

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "His disciples remembered"

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)).
+JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

### "He knew what was in man"

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "His disciples remembered"

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)).
JHN 2 1 rl16 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus and his disciples are invited to a wedding. These verse give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 2 1 vw9e 0 Three days later Most interpreters read this as on the third day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him. The first day occurs in John 1:35 and the second in John 1:43. JHN 2 2 xm3r figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη ... ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον 1 Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: "Someone invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ JHN 2 23 kvn6 ὡς δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 Now JHN 2 23 w3qv figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 believed in his name Here "name" is a metonym that represents the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: "believed in him" or "trusted in him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 2 23 u65n τὰ σημεῖα ἃ ἐποίει 1 the signs that he did Miracles can also be called "signs" because they are used as evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. JHN 2 25 et23 figs-gendernotations περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ... γὰρ ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ 1 about man, for he knew what was in man Here the word "man" represents people in general. Alternate translation: "about people, for he knew what was in people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 3 1 yl6f 0 General Information: Nicodemus comes to see Jesus. JHN 3 1 s9p9 writing-participants δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a new part of the story and to introduce Nicodemus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) JHN 3 2 skq8 οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here "we" is exclusive, referring only to Nicodemus and the other members of the Jewish council. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ JHN 3 35 hmk4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples 0 Father ... Son These are importan JHN 3 35 ha4e figs-idiom 0 given ... into his hand This means to be put in his power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 3 36 u1ks ὁ πιστεύων 1 He who believes "A person who believes" or "Anyone who believes" JHN 3 36 zy7u ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the wrath of God stays on him The abstract noun "wrath" can be translated with the verb "punish." Alternate translation: "God will continue to punish him" (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the "living water" who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria"

Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])

#### "The hour is coming"

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. "The hour" in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.

#### The proper place of worship

Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).

#### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God's kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### "The Samaritan woman"

John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "In spirit and truth"

The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important.
+JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the "living water" who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria"

Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])

### "The hour is coming"

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. "The hour" in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.

### The proper place of worship

Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God's kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### "The Samaritan woman"

John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "In spirit and truth"

The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important.
JHN 4 1 jum6 writing-background 0 General Information: John 4:1-6 gives the background to the next event, Jesus' conversation with a Samaritan woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 4 1 ci4n 0 Connecting Statement: A long sentence begins here. JHN 4 1 b1vc ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς πλείονας μαθητὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει ἢ Ἰωάννης 1 Now when Jesus knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was making and baptizing more disciples than John "Now Jesus was making and baptizing more disciples than John. When he knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was doing this." @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ JHN 4 50 uwa3 figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσεν ... τῷ λόγῳ 1 believed JHN 4 51 a5gw ἤδη 1 While This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. As the official was going home, his servants were coming to meet him on the road. JHN 4 53 jhg4 καὶ ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλη 1 So he himself and his whole household believed The reflexive pronoun "himself" is used here to emphasize the word "he." If you have a way of doing this in your language, you may consider using it. JHN 4 54 k5x6 σημεῖον 1 sign Miracles can also be called "signs" because they are used as indicators or evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. -JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were "stirred up."

#### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

#### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the "Son" ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the "Son of God" ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the "Son of Man" ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were "stirred up."

### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the "Son" ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the "Son of God" ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the "Son of Man" ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 5 1 urn9 writing-background 0 General Information: This is the next event in the story, in which Jesus goes up to Jerusalem and heals a man. These verses give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 1 ea65 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After this This refers to after Jesus healed the official's son. See how you translated this in [John 3:22](../03/22.md). JHN 5 1 b1pz ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 there was a Jewish festival "the Jews were celebrating a festival" @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ JHN 5 45 kk5q figs-metonymy ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μω JHN 5 45 pf98 ἠλπίκατε 1 your hope "your confidence" or "your trust" JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion 0 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: "You do not believe his writings, so you will never believe my words!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 τοῖς ... ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words "what I say" -JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people's sins and that the world would persecute his people.

### Important metaphors in this chapter

#### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus' day, and so the word "bread" was their general word for "food." It is often difficult to translate the word "bread" into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus' culture. Jesus used the word "bread" to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

#### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, "Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves," he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Parenthetical Ideas
Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 6;26](./26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people's sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus' day, and so the word "bread" was their general word for "food." It is often difficult to translate the word "bread" into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus' culture. Jesus used the word "bread" to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, "Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves," he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Parenthetical Ideas
Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 6;26](./26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 6 1 qhj7 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus has traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. These verses tell the setting of this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 1 el4l μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things The phrase "these things" refers to the events in [John 5:1-46](../05/01.md) and introduces the event that follows. JHN 6 1 z345 figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus went away It is implied in the text that Jesus traveled by boat and took his disciples with him. Alternate translation: "Jesus traveled by boat with his disciples" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ JHN 6 67 bg2f figs-ellipsis τοῖς δώδεκα 1 the twelve This is an ellip JHN 6 68 g9l4 figs-rquestion 0 Lord, to whom shall we go? Simon Peter gives this remark in the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. Alternate translation: "Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 6 70 z9yc writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 71 is not part of the main story line as John comments on what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 70 m9ys figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν 1 Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil? Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question to draw attention to the fact that one of the disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: "I chose you all myself, yet one of you is a servant of Satan!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "My time has not yet come"
This phrase and "his hour had not yet come" are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

#### "Living water"
This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Prophecy
Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

#### Irony
Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Did not believe in him"
Jesus' brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### "The Jews"
This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms "Jewish leaders" and "Jewish people" or "Jews (leaders)" and "Jews (in general)."
+JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "My time has not yet come"
This phrase and "his hour had not yet come" are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

### "Living water"
This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prophecy
Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

### Irony
Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Did not believe in him"
Jesus' brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### "The Jews"
This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms "Jewish leaders" and "Jewish people" or "Jews (leaders)" and "Jews (in general)."
JHN 7 1 gg4v writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus is in Galilee speaking to his brothers. These verses tell about when this event occurred. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 1 b99m μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things These words tell the reader that the writer will begin talking about a new event. "After he finished speaking with the disciples" ([John 6:66-71](../06/66.md)) or "Some time later" JHN 7 1 k5yv περιεπάτει 1 traveled The reader should understand that Jesus probably walked rather than riding an animal or in a vehicle. @@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ JHN 7 52 pt91 figs-rquestion 0 Are you also from Galilee? The Jewish leaders kn JHN 7 52 k6pg figs-ellipsis ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε 1 Search and see This is an ellipsis. You may wish to include the information that does not appear. Alternate translation: "Search carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 7 52 jm59 προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται 1 no prophet comes from Galilee This probably refers to the belief that Jesus was born in Galilee. JHN 7 53 s5fi translate-textvariants 0 General Information: The best early texts do not have 7:53 - 8:11. The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. Translators are encouraged to translate them, to set them apart with square brackets, and to include a footnote like the one written on [John 7:53](../07/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### A light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for "I AM," by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

#### The Scribes and Pharisees' trap

The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for "I AM," by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

### The Scribes and Pharisees' trap

The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 8 1 mkz2 0 General Information: While some texts have 7:53 - 8:11, the best and earliest texts do not include them. JHN 8 1 mkz2 0 General Information: The next part of the story begins in verse 2 as Jesus has returned to the temple. JHN 8 1 te4y 0 Connecting Statement: Verse 1 tells us where Jesus went at the end of the previous chapter. @@ -664,7 +664,7 @@ JHN 8 57 r1ek figs-rquestion πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, JHN 8 58 rnw4 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly See how you translated this in [John 1:51](../01/51.md). JHN 8 58 k4tp ἐγὼ εἰμί 1 I AM Possible meanings are 1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as "I AM," or 2) Jesus is saying, "before Abraham existed, I existed." JHN 8 59 bxs5 figs-explicit ἦραν οὖν λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Then they picked up stones to throw at him The Jewish leaders are outraged at what Jesus has said. Here it is implied that they wanted to kill him because he had made himself equal to God. Alternate translation: "Then they picked up stones to kill him because he claimed to be equal with God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 09 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Who sinned?"

Many of the Jews of Jesus' time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

#### "He does not keep the Sabbath"

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### Important metaphors in this chapter

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Who sinned?"

Many of the Jews of Jesus' time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### "He does not keep the Sabbath"

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 9 1 fa5a 0 General Information: As Jesus and his disciples are walking along, they come across a blind man. JHN 9 1 un4h writing-newevent καὶ 1 Now This word shows that the author is about to describe a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 9 1 z5sx figs-synecdoche παράγων 1 as Jesus passed by Here "Jesus" is a synecdoche for Jesus and the disciples. Alternate translation: "as Jesus and his disciples passed by" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ JHN 9 39 te5y figs-metaphor ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσ JHN 9 40 d8mm καὶ ... ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν 1 Are we also blind? "Do you think we are spiritually blind?" JHN 9 41 rh3l figs-metaphor εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν 1 If you were blind, you would have no sin Here "blindness" is a metaphor for not knowing God's truth. Alternate translation: "If you wanted to know God's truth, you would be able to receive your sight. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 41 jmq7 figs-metaphor 0 but now you say, 'We see,' so your sin remains Here "seeing" is a metaphor for knowing God's truth. Alternate translation: "Since you falsely think that you already know God's truth, you will remain blind" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Blasphemy

When a person claims that he is God or that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak, this is called blasphemy. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by stoning them to death. When Jesus said, "I and the Father are one," the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they took up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Important metaphors in this chapter

#### Sheep

Jesus spoke of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, they do not think well, they often walk away from those who care for them, and they cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God's people also rebel against him and do not know when they are doing wrong.

#### Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them.

#### Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could lay down on the ground, a metaphor for dying, or pick up again, a metaphor for becoming alive again.
+JHN 10 intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Blasphemy

When a person claims that he is God or that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak, this is called blasphemy. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by stoning them to death. When Jesus said, "I and the Father are one," the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they took up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Sheep

Jesus spoke of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, they do not think well, they often walk away from those who care for them, and they cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God's people also rebel against him and do not know when they are doing wrong.

### Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them.

### Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could lay down on the ground, a metaphor for dying, or pick up again, a metaphor for becoming alive again.
JHN 10 1 gzd8 figs-parables 0 General Information: Jesus begins to speak in parables. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) JHN 10 1 ab9x 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to speak to the Pharisees. This is the same part of the story which began in [John 9:35](../09/35.md). JHN 10 1 i3tj ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly See how you translated this in [John 1:51](../01/51.md). @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ JHN 10 40 f5dx figs-explicit ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ 1 he stayed there Jesus JHN 10 41 m1pl Ἰωάννης μὲν σημεῖον ἐποίησεν οὐδέν; πάντα δὲ ὅσα εἶπεν Ἰωάννης περὶ τούτου ἀληθῆ ἦν 1 John indeed did no signs, but all the things that John has said about this man are true "It is true that John did no signs, but he certainly did speak the truth about this man, who does signs." JHN 10 41 lw9n σημεῖον 1 signs These are miracles that prove that something is true or that give someone credibility. JHN 10 42 ieh5 ἐπίστευσαν εἰς 1 believed in Here "believed in" means accepted or trusted what Jesus said was true. -JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were trying hard to kill him, so he started traveling from place to place in secret. Now the Pharisees knew that he would probably come to Jerusalem for the Passover because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem, so they planned to catch him and kill him then. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### "One man dies for the people"

The law of Moses commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people's sins. The high priest Caiaphas said, "It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes" ([John 10:50](../../jhn/10/50.md)). He said this because he loved his "place" and "nation" ([John 10:48](../../jhn/10/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem, but God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people's sins.

#### Hypothetical situation

When Martha said, "If you had been here, my brother would not have died," she was speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen. Jesus had not come, and her brother had died.
+JHN 11 intro tks5 0 # John 11 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Passover

After Jesus made Lazarus become alive again, the Jewish leaders were trying hard to kill him, so he started traveling from place to place in secret. Now the Pharisees knew that he would probably come to Jerusalem for the Passover because God had commanded all Jewish men to celebrate the Passover in Jerusalem, so they planned to catch him and kill him then. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "One man dies for the people"

The law of Moses commanded the priests to kill animals so that God would forgive the people's sins. The high priest Caiaphas said, "It is better for you that one man dies for the people than that the whole nation perishes" ([John 10:50](../../jhn/10/50.md)). He said this because he loved his "place" and "nation" ([John 10:48](../../jhn/10/48.md)) more than he loved the God who had made Lazarus become alive again. He wanted Jesus to die so that the Romans would not destroy the temple and Jerusalem, but God wanted Jesus to die so that he could forgive all of his people's sins.

### Hypothetical situation

When Martha said, "If you had been here, my brother would not have died," she was speaking of a situation that could have happened but did not happen. Jesus had not come, and her brother had died.
JHN 11 1 fsf7 writing-participants 0 General Information: These verses introduce the story of Lazarus and give background information about him and his sister Mary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 2 c6r9 writing-background 0 It was Mary who anointed the Lord ... her hair As John introduces Mary, the sister of Martha, he also shares information concerning what would later happen in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 3 i2ar ἀπέστειλαν ... πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 sent for Jesus "asked Jesus to come" @@ -895,7 +895,7 @@ JHN 11 56 a5kt figs-events 0 General Information: The content of verse 57 occur JHN 11 56 kc75 ἐζήτουν ... τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 They were looking for Jesus The word "they" refers to the Jewish people who had traveled to Jerusalem. JHN 11 56 p2wz figs-rquestion τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν? ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν 1 What do you think? That he will not come to the festival? These are rhetorical questions that express a strong element of doubt that Jesus will come to the Passover Festival. The second question is an ellipsis that leaves out the words "do you think." The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since there was the danger of his being arrested. Alternate translation: "Jesus will probably not come to the festival. He might be afraid of getting arrested!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 57 glb6 writing-background δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Now the chief priests This is background information that explains why the Jewish worshipers were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival or not. If your language has a way to mark background information, use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 12 intro qzv4 0 # John 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:38 and 40, which are words from the Old Testament.

Verse 16 is a commentary on these events. It is possible to put this entire verse in parentheses in order to set it apart from the narrative of the story.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Mary anointed Jesus' feet

The Jews would put oil on a person's head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person's body after the person had died but before they buried the body. But they would never think to put oil on a person's feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.

#### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

#### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection ([John 12:16](../../jhn/12/16.md)).

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### The metaphors of light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in 12:25: "He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life." But in 12:26 Jesus explains what it means to keep one's life for eternal life. ([John 12:25-26](./25.md)).
+JHN 12 intro qzv4 0 # John 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:38 and 40, which are words from the Old Testament.

Verse 16 is a commentary on these events. It is possible to put this entire verse in parentheses in order to set it apart from the narrative of the story.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mary anointed Jesus' feet

The Jews would put oil on a person's head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person's body after the person had died but before they buried the body. But they would never think to put oil on a person's feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both a donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../../jhn/12/14.md))

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection ([John 12:16](../../jhn/12/16.md)).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The metaphors of light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in 12:25: "He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life." But in 12:26 Jesus explains what it means to keep one's life for eternal life. ([John 12:25-26](./25.md)).
JHN 12 1 elj4 0 General Information: Jesus is at dinner in Bethany when Mary anoints his feet with oil. JHN 12 1 s1v2 writing-newevent πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα 1 Six days before the Passover The author uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 12 1 z1jp figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 had raised from the dead This is an idiom. Alternate translation: "had made alive again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -981,7 +981,7 @@ JHN 12 47 xvq6 figs-explicit 0 If anyone hears my words but does not keep them, JHN 12 48 b1ds ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the last day "at the time when God judges people's sins" JHN 12 49 ybm5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 12 50 tar2 οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν 1 I know that his command is eternal life "I know that the words that he commanded me to speak are the words that give life forever" -JHN 13 intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the last supper or the Lord's supper. This Passover feast in many ways parallels Jesus' sacrifice as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The washing of feet

People in the ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people's feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet because they considered him their master and themselves his servants, but he wanted to show them that they needed to serve each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

#### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, once in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for "I AM," by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 13:31](../../jhn/13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+JHN 13 intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the last supper or the Lord's supper. This Passover feast in many ways parallels Jesus' sacrifice as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The washing of feet

People in the ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people's feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet because they considered him their master and themselves his servants, but he wanted to show them that they needed to serve each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, once in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for "I AM," by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Son of Man"

Jesus refers to himself as the "Son of Man" in this chapter ([John 13:31](../../jhn/13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
JHN 13 1 wk2k writing-background 0 General Information: It is not yet Passover and Jesus is together with his disciples for supper. These verses explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 13 1 w7w3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 13 1 a1w4 ἀγαπήσας 1 loved This is the kind of love that comes from God, which is focused on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do. @@ -1034,7 +1034,7 @@ JHN 13 35 kyd9 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 everyone You may need to make expli JHN 13 37 ye6m τὴν ψυχήν μου ... θήσω 1 lay down my life "give up my life" or "die" JHN 13 38 qp88 figs-rquestion τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις 1 Will you lay down your life for me? This remark appears in the form of a question to add emphasis to Jesus' statement. Alternate translation: "You say that you will die for me, but the truth is that you will not!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 38 sp7p οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως ... ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times "you will say that you do not know me three times before the rooster crows" -JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "My Father's house"

Jesus used these words to speak of heaven, where God lives, not of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

#### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God's people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God's people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
+JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "My Father's house"

Jesus used these words to speak of heaven, where God lives, not of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God's people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God's people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])
JHN 14 1 a2xv 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metonymy μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's inner being. Alternate translation: "Stop being so anxious and worried" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 2 cp9z ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου, μοναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν 1 In my Father's house are many rooms "There are many places to live in my Father's house" @@ -1098,7 +1098,7 @@ JHN 14 30 ah3s τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler of this world Here "rul JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit 0 ruler ... is coming Here Jesus implies that Satan is coming to attack him. Alternate translation: "Satan is coming to attack me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will know Here the "world" is a metonym for the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: "in order that the ones who do not belong to God may know" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Here the "true vine" is a metaphor. Jesus compares himself to a vine or a vine stem. He is the source of life that causes people to live in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: "I am like a vine that produces good fruit" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener The "gardener" is a metaphor. A "gardener" is a person who takes care of the vine to ensure it is as fruitful as possible. Alternate translation: "my Father is like a gardener" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1153,7 +1153,7 @@ JHN 15 26 tpw6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father This is an im JHN 15 26 tzi9 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the Spirit of truth This is a title for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: "the Spirit who tells the truth about God and me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 27 r47f figs-explicit καὶ ὑμεῖς ... μαρτυρεῖτε 1 You are also testifying Here "testifying" means to tell others about Jesus. Alternate translation: "You also must tell everyone what you know about me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here the "beginning" is a metonym that means the first days of Jesus' ministry. Alternate translation: "from the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God's people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God's people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

#### "The hour is coming"

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. "The hour" in which people would persecute his followers ([John 16:2](../../jhn/16/02.md)) was days, weeks, and years long, but "the hour" in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([John 16:32](../../jhn/16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain as she gives birth to a baby and his followers would be sad when he died. But the woman is glad after the baby is born, and his followers would be happy when he became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God's people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God's people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### "The hour is coming"

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. "The hour" in which people would persecute his followers ([John 16:2](../../jhn/16/02.md)) was days, weeks, and years long, but "the hour" in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([John 16:32](../../jhn/16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain as she gives birth to a baby and his followers would be sad when he died. But the woman is glad after the baby is born, and his followers would be happy when he became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
JHN 16 1 pbc8 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here the phrase "fall away" implies to stop putting one's trust in Jesus. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "you will not stop trusting in me because of the difficulties you must face" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 16 2 i79b 0 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God "it will someday happen that a person will kill you and think he is doing something good for God." @@ -1214,7 +1214,7 @@ JHN 16 32 yza2 figs-activepassive σκορπισθῆτε 1 you will be scattere JHN 16 32 k3br guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν 1 the Father is with me This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 16 33 k6d6 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε 1 so that you will have peace in me Here "peace" refers to inner peace. Alternate translation: "so that you may have inner peace because of your relationship with me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 33 z7wj figs-metonymy ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον 1 I have conquered the world Here "the world" refers to the troubles and persecution that believers will endure from those who oppose God. Alternate translation: "I have conquered the troubles of this world" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter forms one long prayer.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([John 17:1](../../jhn/17/01.md)).

#### Jesus is eternal

Jesus existed before God created the world ([John 17:5](../../jhn/17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [John 1:1](../../jhn/01/01.md).

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Prayer

Jesus is God's one and only Son ([John 3:16](../../jhn/03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that sounded like commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be happy.
+JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter forms one long prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God's glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([John 17:1](../../jhn/17/01.md)).

### Jesus is eternal

Jesus existed before God created the world ([John 17:5](../../jhn/17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [John 1:1](../../jhn/01/01.md).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Prayer

Jesus is God's one and only Son ([John 3:16](../../jhn/03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that sounded like commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be happy.
JHN 17 1 uf8z 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God. JHN 17 1 b4pj figs-idiom ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 he lifted up his eyes to the heavens This is an idiom that means to look upward. Alternate translation: "he looked up to the sky" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 17 1 k7tb οὐρανὸν 1 heavens This refers to the sky. @@ -1267,7 +1267,7 @@ JHN 17 25 ur9j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ δίκαιε 1 Righteous JHN 17 25 xpf5 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος σε οὐκ ἔγνω 1 the world did not know you The "world" is a metonym for the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: "those who do not belong to you do not know what you are like" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 26 xpi3 figs-metonymy ἐγνώρισα αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I made your name known to them The word "name" refers to God. Alternate translation: "I have revealed to them what you are like" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 26 gk2j 0 love ... loved This kind of love comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do. -JHN 18 intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Verse 14 says, "Now Caiaphas was the one who had given the advice to the Jews that it would be better that one man die for the people." The author says this to help the reader understand why it was to Caiaphas that they took Jesus. You might want to put these words in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "It is not lawful for us to put any man to death"

The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([John 18:31](../../jhn/18/31.md)).

#### Jesus' kingdom

No one knows for sure what Jesus meant when he told Pilate that his kingdom was not "of this world" ([John 18:36](../../jhn/18/36.md)). Some people think that Jesus means that his kingdom is only spiritual and that he has no visible kingdom on this earth, Other people think that Jesus meant that he would not build and rule his kingdom by force, the way other kings build theirs. It is possible to translate the words "is not of this world" as "is not from this place" or "comes from another place."

#### King of the Jews

When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([John 18:33](../../jhn/18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be like King Herod, whom the Romans were permitting to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([John 18:39](../../jhn/18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all, (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
+JHN 18 intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Verse 14 says, "Now Caiaphas was the one who had given the advice to the Jews that it would be better that one man die for the people." The author says this to help the reader understand why it was to Caiaphas that they took Jesus. You might want to put these words in parentheses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "It is not lawful for us to put any man to death"

The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([John 18:31](../../jhn/18/31.md)).

### Jesus' kingdom

No one knows for sure what Jesus meant when he told Pilate that his kingdom was not "of this world" ([John 18:36](../../jhn/18/36.md)). Some people think that Jesus means that his kingdom is only spiritual and that he has no visible kingdom on this earth, Other people think that Jesus meant that he would not build and rule his kingdom by force, the way other kings build theirs. It is possible to translate the words "is not of this world" as "is not from this place" or "comes from another place."

### King of the Jews

When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([John 18:33](../../jhn/18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be like King Herod, whom the Romans were permitting to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([John 18:39](../../jhn/18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all, (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
JHN 18 1 sq3t writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 1-2 give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 tells where they took place, and verse 2 gives background information about Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 18 1 cxz8 writing-newevent ταῦτα εἰπὼν, Ἰησοῦς 1 After Jesus spoke these words The author uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 18 1 z9bw translate-names Κεδρὼν 1 Kidron Valley a valley in Jerusalem separating the Temple Mount from the Mount of Olives (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1334,7 +1334,7 @@ JHN 18 38 zbm5 figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια 1 What is truth? JHN 18 38 rma7 figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 the Jews Here "Jews" is a synecdoche that refers to the Jewish leaders who opposed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 18 40 a7pl figs-ellipsis μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν 1 Not this man, but Barabbas This is an ellipsis. You can add the implied words. Alternate translation: "No! Do not release this man! Release Barabbas instead" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 18 40 h11k writing-background ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής 1 Now Barabbas was a robber Here John provides background information about Barabbas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 19 intro u96u 0 # John 19 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 19:24, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Purple garment"

Purple is a color like red or blue. The people were mocking Jesus, so they put him in a purple garment. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

#### "You are not Caesar's friend"

Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar's laws ([John 19:12](../../jhn/19/12.md)).

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 19:41](../../jhn/19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Sarcasm

The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, "Hail, King of the Jews." Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, "Should I crucify your king?" He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, "Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Gabbatha, Golgotha

These are two Hebrew words. After translating the meanings of these words ("The Pavement" and "The Place of a Skull"), the author transliterates their sounds by writing them with Greek letters.
+JHN 19 intro u96u 0 # John 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 19:24, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Purple garment"

Purple is a color like red or blue. The people were mocking Jesus, so they put him in a purple garment. This was because kings wore purple garments. They spoke and acted like they were giving honor to a king, but everyone knew that they were doing it because they hated Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### "You are not Caesar's friend"

Pilate knew that Jesus was not a criminal, so he did not want to have his soldiers kill him. But the Jews told him that Jesus was claiming to be a king, and anyone who did that was breaking Caesar's laws ([John 19:12](../../jhn/19/12.md)).

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 19:41](../../jhn/19/41.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they said, "Hail, King of the Jews." Pilate was insulting the Jews when he asked, "Should I crucify your king?" He was probably also insulting both Jesus and the Jews when he wrote, "Jesus of Nazareth, King of the Jews." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Gabbatha, Golgotha

These are two Hebrew words. After translating the meanings of these words ("The Pavement" and "The Place of a Skull"), the author transliterates their sounds by writing them with Greek letters.
JHN 19 1 u3gi 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus is standing before Pilate as he is being accused by the Jews. JHN 19 1 yay2 figs-synecdoche 0 Then Pilate took Jesus and whipped him Pilate himself did not whip Jesus. Here "Pilate" is a synecdoche for the soldiers that Pilate ordered to whip Jesus. Alternate translation: "Then Pilate ordered his soldiers to whip Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 19 3 u4vw figs-irony χαῖρε, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Hail, King of the Jews The greeting "Hail" with a raised hand was only used to greet Caesar. As the soldiers use the crown of thorns and the purple robe to mock Jesus, it is ironic that they do not recognize that he is indeed a king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ JHN 19 41 fb25 writing-background 0 Now in the place where he was crucified the JHN 19 41 uib1 figs-activepassive ἦν δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη κῆπος 1 Now in the place where he was crucified there was a garden You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "Now in the place where they crucified Jesus there was a garden" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 41 qd1a figs-activepassive ἐν ... ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἦν τεθειμένος 1 in which no person had yet been buried You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "in which people had buried no one" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 42 nr4r figs-explicit 0 Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews According to Jewish law, no one could work after sundown on Friday. It was the beginning of the Sabbath and Passover. Alternate translation: "The Passover was about to begin that evening" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 20:1](../../jhn/20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

#### "Receive the Holy Spirit"

If your language uses the same word for "breath" and "spirit," be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by breathing, and that what the disciples received was the Holy Spirit, not Jesus' breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to describe the sound of the word, and then he explained that it means "Teacher." You should do the same, using the letters of your language.

#### Jesus' resurrection body

No one is sure what Jesus' body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew it was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet, But he could also walk through solid walls and doors. It is best not to try to say more than what the ULT says.

#### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
+JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([John 20:1](../../jhn/20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### "Receive the Holy Spirit"

If your language uses the same word for "breath" and "spirit," be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by breathing, and that what the disciples received was the Holy Spirit, not Jesus' breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to describe the sound of the word, and then he explained that it means "Teacher." You should do the same, using the letters of your language.

### Jesus' resurrection body

No one is sure what Jesus' body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew it was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet, But he could also walk through solid walls and doors. It is best not to try to say more than what the ULT says.

### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus' tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md))
JHN 20 1 k5pq 0 General Information: This is the third day after Jesus was buried. JHN 20 1 a8vl μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 first day of the week "Sunday" JHN 20 1 bdw5 figs-activepassive βλέπει τὸν λίθον ἠρμένον 1 she saw the stone rolled away You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "she saw that someone had rolled away the stone" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ JHN 20 31 am9l figs-activepassive ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται 1 but the JHN 20 31 p5k4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 20 31 uem2 figs-metonymy ζωὴν ... ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 life in his name Here "life" is a metonym that means Jesus gives life. Alternate translation: "you may have life because of Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 20 31 ip1i ζωὴν 1 life This refers to spiritual life. -JHN 21 intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes
### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### The metaphor of sheep

Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([John 10:11](../../jhn/10/11.md)). After he became alive again, he told Peter that Peter would be the one who took care of Jesus' sheep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN 21 intro e1bg 0 # John 21 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The metaphor of sheep

Before Jesus died, he spoke of himself taking care of his people as if he were a good shepherd taking care of sheep ([John 10:11](../../jhn/10/11.md)). After he became alive again, he told Peter that Peter would be the one who took care of Jesus' sheep. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JHN 21 1 et5h writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus shows himself again to the disciples at the Sea of Tiberias. Verses 2 and 3 tell us what happens in the story before Jesus appears. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 21 1 yj6k μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things "Some time later" JHN 21 2 b421 figs-activepassive ὁμοῦ ... Θωμᾶς ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος 1 with Thomas called Didymus You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "with Thomas whom we called Didymus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b123eb703..d8e5953a0 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Acts

1. The beginning of the church and its mission (1:1–2:41)
1. The early church in Jerusalem (2:42–6:7)
1. Increasing opposition and the martyrdom of Steven (6:8–7:60)
1. The persecution of the church and Philip's ministry (8:1–40)
1. Paul becomes an apostle (9:1–31)
1. The ministry of Peter and the first Gentile converts (9:32–12:24)
1. Paul, the apostle to Gentiles, the Jewish law, and council of church leaders at Jerusalem (12:25–16:5)
1. The expansion of the church into the middle Mediterranean area and Asia Minor (16:6–19:20)
1. Paul travels to Jerusalem and becomes a prisoner in Rome (19:21–28:31)

### What is the Book of Acts about?

The Book of Acts tells the story of the early church as more and more people became believers. It shows the power of the the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book began when Jesus went back to heaven and ended about thirty years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "The Acts of the Apostles." Or translators may choose a title that may be clearer, for example, "The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles."

### Who wrote the Book of Acts?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, it is addressed to Theophilus, the same person to whom the Gospel of Luke is addressed. Also, in parts of the book, the author uses the word "we." This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought Luke is the author of the Book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He saw many of the events described in the Book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the Church?

The Church is the group of people who believe in Christ. The Church includes both Jew and Gentile believers. The events in this book show God helping the Church. He empowered believers to live righteous lives through his Holy Spirit.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Acts?

These are the most significant textual issues in Acts:

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible, but they are not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Some modern versions put the verses in square brackets ([]). The ULT and UST put them in a footnote.

* "Philip said, 'If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.' The Ethiopian answered, 'I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God'" (Acts 8:37).
* "But it seemed good to Silas to remain there." (Acts 15:34)
* "And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you." (Acts 24:6b-8a)
* "When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves." (Acts 28:29)

In the following verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. Translators will need to choose which reading to translate. The ULT has the first readings but include the second readings in footnotes.
* "They returned from Jerusalem" (Acts 12:25). Some versions read, "They returned to Jerusalem (or to there)."
* "he put up with them" (Acts 13:18). Some versions read, "he cared for them."
* "This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times." (Acts 15:17-18). Some older versions read, "This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter records an event, commonly known as the "Ascension," when Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. He will not come back until he returns at his "second coming." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

The UST has set the words "Dear Theophilus" apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You might want to start this book the way people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotes from Psalms in 1:20.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Baptize

The word "baptize" has two meanings in this chapter. It refers to the water baptism of John and to the baptism of the Holy Spirit ([Acts 1:5](../../act/01/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

#### "He spoke about the kingdom of God"

Some scholars believe that when Jesus "spoke about the kingdom of God," he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God did not come before he died. Others believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was alive and that here Jesus was explaining that it was beginning in a new form.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

#### Akeldama

This is a phrase in Hebrew or Aramaic. Luke used Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it means. You should probably spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter records an event, commonly known as the "Ascension," when Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. He will not come back until he returns at his "second coming." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

The UST has set the words "Dear Theophilus" apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You might want to start this book the way people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotes from Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptize

The word "baptize" has two meanings in this chapter. It refers to the water baptism of John and to the baptism of the Holy Spirit ([Acts 1:5](../../act/01/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### "He spoke about the kingdom of God"

Some scholars believe that when Jesus "spoke about the kingdom of God," he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God did not come before he died. Others believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was alive and that here Jesus was explaining that it was beginning in a new form.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Akeldama

This is a phrase in Hebrew or Aramaic. Luke used Greek letters so his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told what it means. You should probably spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
ACT 1 1 q9ep τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 The former book I wrote The former book is the Gospel of Luke. ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus Luke wrote this book to a man named Theophilus. Some translations follow their own culture's way of addressing a letter and write "Dear Theophilus" at the beginning of the sentence. Theophilus means "friend of God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας ... ἀνελήμφθη 1 until the day that he was taken up This refers to Jesus' ascension into heaven. Alternate translation: "until the day on which God took him up to heaven" or "until the day that he ascended into heaven" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ ACT 1 25 tx6n figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τ ACT 1 26 r84c 0 They cast lots for them The apostles cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias. ACT 1 26 w4ph ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias The lot indicated that Matthias was the one to replace Judas. ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τῶν ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων 1 he was numbered with the eleven apostles This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the believers considered him to be an apostle with the other eleven" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17-21, 25-28, and 34-35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 2:31.

The events described in this chapter are commonly called "Pentecost." Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers in this chapter.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Tongues

The word "tongues" has two meanings in this chapter. Luke describes what came down from heaven ([Acts 2:3](../../act/02/03.md)) as tongues that looked like fire. This is different from "a tongue of flame," which is a fire that looks like a tongue. Luke also uses the word "tongues" to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them ([Acts 2:4](../02/04.md)).

#### Last days

No one knows for sure when the "last days" ([Acts 2:17](../../act/02/17.md)) began. Your translation should not say more than the ULT does about this. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])

#### Baptize

The word "baptize" in this chapter refers to Christian baptism ([Acts 2:38-41](../02/38.md)). Though the event described in [Acts 2:1-11](./01.md) is the baptism of the Holy Spirit that Jesus promised in [Acts 1:5](../../act/01/05.md), the word "baptize" here does not refer to that event. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

#### The prophecy of Joel

Many of the things that Joel said would happen did happen on the day of Pentecost ([Acts 2:17-18](../02/17.md)), but some things Joel spoke of did not happen ([Acts 2:19-20](../02/19.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

#### Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus is who the disciples said he is.
+ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17-21, 25-28, and 34-35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 2:31.

The events described in this chapter are commonly called "Pentecost." Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers in this chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Tongues

The word "tongues" has two meanings in this chapter. Luke describes what came down from heaven ([Acts 2:3](../../act/02/03.md)) as tongues that looked like fire. This is different from "a tongue of flame," which is a fire that looks like a tongue. Luke also uses the word "tongues" to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them ([Acts 2:4](../02/04.md)).

### Last days

No one knows for sure when the "last days" ([Acts 2:17](../../act/02/17.md)) began. Your translation should not say more than the ULT does about this. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])

### Baptize

The word "baptize" in this chapter refers to Christian baptism ([Acts 2:38-41](../02/38.md)). Though the event described in [Acts 2:1-11](./01.md) is the baptism of the Holy Spirit that Jesus promised in [Acts 1:5](../../act/01/05.md), the word "baptize" here does not refer to that event. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### The prophecy of Joel

Many of the things that Joel said would happen did happen on the day of Pentecost ([Acts 2:17-18](../02/17.md)), but some things Joel spoke of did not happen ([Acts 2:19-20](../02/19.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus is who the disciples said he is.
ACT 2 1 i4sa 0 General Information: This is a new event; it is now the Day of Pentecost, 50 days after Passover. ACT 2 1 i4sa 0 General Information: Here the word "they" refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers that Luke mentions in [Acts 1:15](../01/15.md). ACT 2 2 jc1w 0 Suddenly This word refers to an event that happens unexpectedly. @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche 0 they broke bread in homes Bread was part of the ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metonymy 0 with glad and humble hearts Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's emotions. Alternate translation: "joyfully and humbly" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 47 z6ig αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with all the people "praising God. All the people approved of them" ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "those whom the Lord saved" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews because God was fulfilling part of the covenant he had made with Abraham. Peter thought that the Jews were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus, but he

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "You delivered up"

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and told the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter thought that they were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus. But he tells them that they are also the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus' followers to invite them to repent ([Luke 3:26](../../luk/03/26.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
+ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews because God was fulfilling part of the covenant he had made with Abraham. Peter thought that the Jews were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus, but he

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "You delivered up"

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and told the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter thought that they were the ones who were truly guilty of killing Jesus. But he tells them that they are also the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus' followers to invite them to repent ([Luke 3:26](../../luk/03/26.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
ACT 3 1 u6nu writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 2 gives background information about the lame man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 3 1 b5rm 0 Connecting Statement: One day Peter and John go to the temple. ACT 3 1 br7i εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple They did not go into the temple building where only the priests were allowed. Alternate translation: "to the temple courtyard" or "into the temple area" @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ ACT 3 25 g31m figs-activepassive 0 shall all the families of the earth be bless ACT 3 26 b7tz ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 After God raised up his servant "After God caused Jesus to become his servant and made him famous" ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his servant This refers to the Messiah, Jesus. ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 turning every one of you from your wickedness Here "turning ... from" is a metaphor for causing someone stop doing something. Alternate translation: "causing every one of you to stop doing wicked things" or "causing every one of you to repent from your wickedness" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25-26.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

#### "Signs and wonders"

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he can do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Cornerstone

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything about the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Name

"There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved" ([Acts 4:12](../../act/04/12.md)). With these words Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or will ever be on earth can save people.
+ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25-26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### "Signs and wonders"

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he can do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Cornerstone

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything about the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Name

"There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved" ([Acts 4:12](../../act/04/12.md)). With these words Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or will ever be on earth can save people.
ACT 4 1 ew3l 0 Connecting Statement: The religious leaders arrest Peter and John after Peter's having healed the man who was born lame. ACT 4 1 d3tv 0 came upon them "approached them" or "came to them" ACT 4 2 m74s figs-explicit διαπονούμενοι 1 They were deeply troubled "They were very angry." The Sadducees, in particular, would have been angry about what Peter and John were saying because they did not believe in resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-activepassive 0 it was distributed to each one according to ACT 4 36 uc2a writing-participants 0 General Information: Luke introduces Barnabas into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The apostles used this name to show that Joseph was a person who encouraged others. "Son of" is an idiom used to describe a person's behavior or character. Alternate translation: "Encourager" or "one who encourages" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 37 gtv5 figs-idiom 0 laid it at the apostles' feet This means that they presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated this in [Acts 4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: "presented it to the apostles" or "gave it to the apostles" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Satan filled your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit"

No one knows for sure if Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold ([Acts 5:1-10](../05/01.md)), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan.

When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

+ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Satan filled your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit"

No one knows for sure if Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold ([Acts 5:1-10](../05/01.md)), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan.

When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

ACT 5 1 v27a writing-background 0 Continuing the story of how the new Christians shared their belongings with other believers, Luke tells about two believers, Ananias and Sapphria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 5 1 ysl9 δέ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line to tell a new part of the story. ACT 5 2 xm1t συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός 1 his wife also knew it "his wife also knew that he kept back part of the sale money" @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ ACT 5 41 cv8y figs-activepassive 0 they were counted worthy to suffer dishonor ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name Here "the Name" refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: "for Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 42 jj94 πᾶσάν τε ἡμέραν 1 Thereafter every day "After that day, every day." This phrase marks what the apostles did every day through the following days. ACT 5 42 kyp6 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ κατ’ οἶκον 1 in the temple and from house to house They did not go into the temple building where only the priests went. Alternate translation: "in the temple courtyard and in different people's houses" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them had lived in Judea and spoke Hebrew, and others had lived in Gentile areas and spoke Greek. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "His face was like the face of an angel"

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen's face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. It is best for the translation to say only what the ULT says about this.
+ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them had lived in Judea and spoke Hebrew, and others had lived in Gentile areas and spoke Greek. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "His face was like the face of an angel"

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen's face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. It is best for the translation to say only what the ULT says about this.
ACT 6 1 ky47 writing-background 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story. Luke gives important background information to understand the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Now in these days Consider how new parts of a story are introduced in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 6 1 t94s πληθυνόντων 1 was multiplying "was greatly increasing" @@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ ACT 6 13 zv6s οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking "contin ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-idiom παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν 1 handed down to us The phrase "handed down" means "passed on." Alternate translation: "taught our ancestors" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 15 gf7e figs-idiom 0 fixed their eyes on him This is an idiom that means they looked intently at him. Here "eyes" is a metonym for sight. Alternate translation: "looked intently at him" or "stared at him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 15 k8rw figs-simile 0 was like the face of an angel This phrase compares his face to that of an angel but does not say specifically what they have in common. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Stephen said"

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

#### "Full of the Holy Spirit"

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

#### Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph's brothers "sold him into Egypt" ([Acts 7:9](../../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling "over Egypt" and over all of Pharaoh's household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh's household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
+ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Stephen said"

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

### "Full of the Holy Spirit"

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

### Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph's brothers "sold him into Egypt" ([Acts 7:9](../../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling "over Egypt" and over all of Pharaoh's household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh's household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
ACT 7 1 pt4h figs-you 0 General Information: The word "our" includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word "your" is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 7 1 hy9r 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story about Stephen, which began in [Acts 6:8](../06/08.md), continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel's history. Most of this history comes from Moses' writings. ACT 7 2 v5si 0 Brothers and fathers, listen to me Stephen was being very respectful to the council in greeting them as extended family. @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ ACT 7 59 k2el δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit "take m ACT 7 60 u86q translate-symaction 0 He knelt down This is an act of submission to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-litotes μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them This can be stated in a positive way. Alternate translation: "forgive them for this sin" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: "died" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words "So there began."

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

#### Proclaimed

This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word "proclaim" translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
+ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words "So there began."

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word "proclaim" translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
ACT 8 1 tp9e translate-versebridge 0 General Information: It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 8 1 a7uc 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses. ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background 0 So there began ... except the apostles This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen's death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ ACT 8 39 xp52 0 the eunuch saw him no more "the eunuch did not see Philip agai ACT 8 40 r1x7 Φίλιππος ... εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip appeared at Azotus There was no indication of Philip's traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 that region This refers to the area around the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 zfn6 εὐηγγελίζετο τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities "to all the cities in that region" -ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 09 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The Way"

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.

#### "Letters for the synagogues in Damascus"

The "letters" Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he "fell upon the ground." Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, "I have seen the Lord Jesus" because it was a human form that he saw here.
+ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 09 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The Way"

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.

### "Letters for the synagogues in Damascus"

The "letters" Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he "fell upon the ground." Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, "I have seen the Lord Jesus" because it was a human form that he saw here.
ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word "him" refers to the high priest and "he" refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 9 1 yt9e 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation. ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-abstractnouns 0 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples The noun "murder" can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: "still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive 0 This matter became known throughout all Jopp ACT 9 42 fyz4 ἐπίστευσαν ... ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 believed on the Lord "believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus" ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent 0 It happened that "It came about that." This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 43 qar2 Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner "a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins" -ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Unclean

The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God's sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God's people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

#### Baptism and the Holy Spirit

The Holy Spirit "fell on" those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
+ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unclean

The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God's sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God's people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Baptism and the Holy Spirit

The Holy Spirit "fell on" those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
ACT 10 1 m1vx writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 10 1 nfy5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius. ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ ACT 10 46 p6pa αὐτῶν λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγ ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion 0 Can anyone keep water from these people so they should not be baptized, these people who have received ... we? Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. Alternate translation: "No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received ... we!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 t2y9 figs-explicit προσέταξεν ... αὐτοὺς ... βαπτισθῆναι 1 he commanded them to be baptized It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. Alternate translation: "Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them" or "Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here "in the name of Jesus Christ" expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: "be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The Gentiles also had received the word of God"

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to "receive the word of God." Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
+ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The Gentiles also had received the word of God"

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to "receive the word of God." Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
ACT 11 1 uw5m 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new event in the story. ACT 11 1 j7f7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there. ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1047,7 +1047,7 @@ ACT 11 29 de92 δὲ 1 So This word means marks an event that happened because ACT 11 29 rk9z 0 as each one was able The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less. ACT 11 29 up7a 0 the brothers in Judea "the believers in Judea" ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-idiom διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul The hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: "by having Barnabas and Saul take to them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Personification

The "word of God" is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Personification

The "word of God" is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ACT 12 1 u4w7 writing-background 0 General Information: This is background information about Herod's killing James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 12 1 ua9p 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the new persecution, first of James' death and then of Peter's imprisonment and then release. ACT 12 1 ti1y writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ ... λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανε ACT 12 24 wn8m ὁ ... λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God "the message God sent about Jesus" ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 completed their mission This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in [Acts 11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: "delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 25 t7d8 figs-explicit ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 they returned from Jerusalem They went back to Antioch from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: "Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
+ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
ACT 13 1 ce7s writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word "they" probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words "they" and "their" probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 13 1 qa2i 0 Connecting Statement: Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul. ACT 13 1 rej8 0 Now in the church in Antioch "At that time in the church at Antioch" @@ -1337,7 +1337,7 @@ ACT 13 50 n7qe 0 These stirred up a persecution against Paul and Barnabas "The ACT 13 50 cq9h ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out beyond the border of their city "removed Paul and Barnabas from their city" ACT 13 51 xi1z writing-symlanguage ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 shook off the dust from their feet against them This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) ACT 13 52 dp5k οἵ ... μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples This probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left. -ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "The message of his grace"

The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### Zeus and Hermes

The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the "living God." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings."

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
+ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "The message of his grace"

The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Zeus and Hermes

The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the "living God." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings."

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
ACT 14 1 vh8u 0 General Information: The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues. ACT 14 1 hk1z 0 It came about in Iconium that Possible meanings here are 1) "It happened in Iconium that" or 2) "In Iconium as usual" ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι οὕτως 1 spoke in such a way "spoke so powerfully." It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: "spoke the message about Jesus so powerfully" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1421,7 +1421,7 @@ ACT 14 26 f2cg ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτ ACT 14 27 vcd3 0 General Information: Here the words "they," "them," and "They" refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word "he" refers to God. ACT 14 27 i9dv συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 gathered the church together "called the local believers to meet together" ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles God's enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: "God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.

The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the "Jerusalem Council." This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Brothers

In this chapter Luke begins to use the word "brothers" to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.

#### Obeying the law of Moses

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.

#### "Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality"

It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
+ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.

The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the "Jerusalem Council." This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

In this chapter Luke begins to use the word "brothers" to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.

### Obeying the law of Moses

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.

### "Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality"

It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
ACT 15 1 qck6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision. ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit 0 Some men "Some men." You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 p3k9 κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 came down from Judea The phrase "came down" is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch. @@ -1543,7 +1543,7 @@ ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι το ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-explicit διήρχετο 1 he went The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: "they went" or "Paul and Silas went" or "Paul took Silas and went" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 41 t81z διήρχετο ... τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 went through Syria and Cilicia These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus. ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. The word "churches" refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: "encouraging the believers in the churches" or "helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Timothy's circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised..

#### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
+ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy's circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised..

### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
ACT 16 1 l2b1 0 General Information: The first, third, and fourth instances of the word "him" refer to Timothy. The second "him" refers to Paul. ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background 0 This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν ... καὶ 1 Paul also came Here "came" can be translated as "went." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1650,7 +1650,7 @@ ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas' time in ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 came to the house Here "came" can be translated as "went." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia "the home of Lydia" ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations ἰδόντες 1 saw the brothers Here "brothers" refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: "saw the believers" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

#### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were "religious," but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
+ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were "religious," but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
ACT 17 1 q9x4 0 General Information: Here the word "they" refers to Paul and Silas. Compare [Acts 16:40](../16/40.md). The word "them" refers to the Jews at the synagogue in Thessalonica. ACT 17 1 r3qb 0 Connecting Statement: This continues the story of Paul, Silas, and Timothy's missionary trip. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says "they" and not "we." ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story. @@ -1770,7 +1770,7 @@ ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 the men of Athens These are the people w ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked Paul "some ridiculed Paul" or "some laughed at Paul." These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite Dionysius is a man's name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
+ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
ACT 18 1 jat1 writing-background 0 General Information: Aquila and Priscilla are introduced to the story and verses 2 and 3 give background information about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul's travels as he goes to Corinth. ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things "After these events took place in Athens" @@ -1851,7 +1851,7 @@ ACT 18 27 q5f2 ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς 1 wrote to the disci ACT 18 27 f99p τοῖς ... πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who believed by grace "those who had believed in salvation by grace" or "those who by God's grace believed in Jesus" ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως ... τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 Apollos powerfully refuted the Jews in public debate "In public debate Apollos powerfully showed that the Jews were wrong" ACT 18 28 v4sx ἐπιδεικνὺς διὰ τῶν Γραφῶν εἶναι τὸν Χριστὸν, Ἰησοῦν 1 showing by the scriptures that Jesus is the Christ "as he showed them by the scriptures that Jesus is the Christ" -ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus' followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

#### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
+ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus' followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
ACT 19 1 rhv1 0 General Information: The "upper country" was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea. ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus. ACT 19 1 lp23 0 It came about that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. @@ -1971,7 +1971,7 @@ ACT 19 39 hxh3 εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it shall be settled in the regular assembly This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "let us settle it in the regular assembly" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive 0 in danger of being accused concerning this day's riot This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul's last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

#### "Compelled by the Spirit"

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
+ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul's last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### "Compelled by the Spirit"

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels. ACT 20 1 y5cq 0 After the uproar "After the riot" or "Following the riot" ACT 20 1 hr32 παρακαλέσας ἀσπασάμενος 1 he said farewell "he said goodbye" @@ -2079,7 +2079,7 @@ ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction 0 he knelt down and prayed It was a common c ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 embraced Paul "hugged him closely" or "put their arms around him" ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 kissed him Kissing someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche 0 they would never see his face again The word "face" here represents Paul's physical body. Alternate translation: "will not see me anymore on this earth" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul's journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "They are all determined to keep the law"

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

#### Nazarite vow
The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../../act/21/23.md)).

#### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

#### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
+ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul's journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "They are all determined to keep the law"

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow
The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../../act/21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word "we" refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 i6f8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels. ACT 21 1 zz5h 0 we took a straight course to the city of Cos "we went straight to the city of Cos" or "we went directly to the city of Cos" @@ -2206,7 +2206,7 @@ ACT 21 40 qp2q figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτρέψαντος ... αὐτοῦ 1 t ACT 21 40 a4y2 ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν 1 Paul stood on the steps The word "steps" here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress. ACT 21 40 rk1y figs-explicit κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with the hand to the people It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with the hand. Alternate translation: "motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 40 xj6i πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης 1 When there was a deep silence "When the people were completely silent" -ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "In the Hebrew language"

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

#### "The Way"

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.

#### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
+ACT 22 intro gq5g 0 # Acts 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This is the second account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 26](../26/01.md))

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "In the Hebrew language"

Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew.

### "The Way"

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers "followers of the Way." This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or "way." If this is true, the believers were "following the way of the Lord" by living in a way that pleased God.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
ACT 22 1 kq95 writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 2 gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 22 1 a8ir 0 Connecting Statement: Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem. ACT 22 1 xe46 0 Brothers and fathers This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul's age as well as the older men in the audience. @@ -2285,7 +2285,7 @@ ACT 22 30 g33i 0 General Information: Here the word "he" refers to the chief c ACT 22 30 np3d βουλόμενος 1 chief captain a military officer of about 600 soldiers ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-metonymy 0 So he untied his bonds Possibly the "chief officer" stands for the chief officers' soldiers. Alternate translation: "So the chief captain ordered his soldiers to untie Paul's bonds" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 30 c5ia καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον 1 he brought Paul down From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts. -ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

#### "Called a curse"

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

#### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection of the dead

The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### "Called a curse"

Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The "chief captain" could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Whitewash

This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 23 1 z2sq 0 Connecting Statement: Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members ([Acts 22:30](../22/30.md)). ACT 23 1 jru4 0 Brothers Here this means "Fellow Jews." ACT 23 1 nn2q ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας 1 I have lived before God in all good conscience until this day "I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do" @@ -2364,7 +2364,7 @@ ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations 0 he asked what province Paul was from. When Thi ACT 23 35 dwv2 figs-quotations ἔφη 1 he said This sentence, which begins with the words "When he learned" in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: "Paul said, 'I am from Cilicia.' Then the governor said" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 23 35 uji1 διακούσομαί σου 1 I will hear you fully "I will listen to all you have to say" ACT 23 35 mga2 κελεύσας ... φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 he commanded him to be kept This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "he commanded soldiers to keep him" or "commanded soldiers to restrain him" -ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Governmental leaders

The words "governor," "commander," and "centurion" may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words "governor," "commander," and "centurion" may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 24 1 qw1r figs-you 0 General Information: Here the word "you" refers to Felix, the governor. Here "we" refers to the citizens under Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 1 bc8k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul. ACT 24 1 e8rp 0 After five days "five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea" @@ -2436,7 +2436,7 @@ ACT 24 26 n45p 0 so he often sent for him and spoke with him "so Felix often s ACT 24 27 ur2y translate-names Πόρκιον Φῆστον 1 Porcius Festus This was the new roman Governor who replaced Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 27 p59c figs-synecdoche θέλων ... χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 wanted to gain favor with the Jews Here "the Jews" refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: "wanted the Jewish leaders to like him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 24 27 gln6 ὁ Φῆλιξ ... κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον 1 he left Paul to continue under guard "he left Paul in prison" -ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Favor

This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus "wanted to gain the favor of the Jews," he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])

#### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.

+ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Favor

This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus "wanted to gain the favor of the Jews," he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.

ACT 25 1 c84u 0 General Information: Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 24:27](../24/27.md). ACT 25 1 tj76 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to be a prisoner in Caesarea. ACT 25 1 w8h3 οὖν 1 Now This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story. @@ -2505,7 +2505,7 @@ ACT 25 26 jcq2 0 I have brought him to you, especially to you, King Agrippa "I ACT 25 26 rhy2 0 so that I might have something more to write "so that I will have something else to write" or "so that I will know what I should write" ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives 0 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not also state The negative words "unreasonable" and "to not" can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him Possible meanings are 1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or 2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul's case. -ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This is the third account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))

Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
+ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This is the third account of Paul's conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul's conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))

Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
ACT 26 1 b34d 0 Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa. ACT 26 1 gz9f Ἀγρίππας 1 Agrippa Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md). ACT 26 1 wme6 ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 stretched out his hand "held out his hand" or "gestured with his hand" @@ -2582,7 +2582,7 @@ ACT 26 30 u8vl ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμ ACT 26 31 q1tw ἀναχωρήσαντες 1 the hall This is a large room for ceremonies, trials, and other events. ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-abstractnouns 0 This man does nothing worthy of death or of bonds The abstract noun "death" can be stated as the verb "die." Here "bonds" stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: "This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive 0 This man could have been freed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "This man could have gone free" or "I could have freed this man" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sailing

People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.

#### Trust

Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

#### Paul breaks bread

Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
+ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sailing

People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.

### Trust

Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Paul breaks bread

Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
ACT 27 1 efe4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. The word "we" includes the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 1 dyf5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome. ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive 0 When it was decided This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When the king and the governor decided" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2695,7 +2695,7 @@ ACT 27 42 qul7 0 The soldiers' plan was "The soldiers were planning" ACT 27 43 s2sz ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος 1 so he stopped their plan "so he stopped them from doing what they planned to do" ACT 27 43 br8u ἀπορίψαντας 1 jump overboard "jump off the ship into the water" ACT 27 44 hw7p 0 some on planks "some on wooden boards" -ACT 28 intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Letters" and "brothers"

The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.

When the Jewish leaders spoke of "brothers," they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "He was a god"

The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
+ACT 28 intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Letters" and "brothers"

The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.

When the Jewish leaders spoke of "brothers," they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "He was a god"

The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
ACT 28 1 p1bd figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word "we" refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 28 1 twx8 0 Connecting Statement: After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months. ACT 28 1 j1yf figs-activepassive 0 When we were brought safely through This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When we arrived safely" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv index 599997910..6c31b04e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God's plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

### Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

### What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to "bring about the obedience of faith" (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Romans." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to the Church in Rome," or "A Letter to the Christians in Rome." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are "justification" (5:1), "works of the law" (3:20), "reconcile" (5:10), "propitiation" (3:25), "sanctification" (6:19), and "the old man" (6:6).

The "key terms" dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term "gospel" can be translated as "the good news about Jesus Christ."

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, "righteousness" sometimes means that a person obeys God's law. At other times, "righteousness" means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God's law for us.

### What did Paul mean by "a remnant" of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a "remnant" is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as "the remnant."

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by being "in Christ"?

The phrase "in Christ" and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 ("the redemption that is in Christ Jesus"), Paul referred to our being redeemed "because" of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 ("you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit"), Paul spoke of believers submitting "to" the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 ("I tell the truth in Christ"), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that "is in agreement with" Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use "in." He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of "in," such as, "by means of," "in the manner of," or "in regard to." But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of "in union with." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])

### How are the ideas of "holy," "saints" or "holy ones," and "sanctify" represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses "holy," "holy God," "holy ones" or "holy people." (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have "saints" or "holy ones," the ULT uses "believers." (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "set apart," "dedicated to," "consecrated," or "reserved for." (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.

* "he [God] works all things together for good" (8:28). Some older versions read, "All things work together for good."
* "But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace" (11:6). Some older versions read: "But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work."

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators' region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.

* "May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen" (16:24).

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a "salutation."

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The gospel
This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as "the gospel" ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

#### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person's faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul's work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God
This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### "God gave them over"
Many scholars view the phrases "God gave them over" and "God gave them up" as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: "obedience of faith," "whom I serve in my spirit," "from faith to faith" and "exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man."
+ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a "salutation."

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel
This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as "the gospel" ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person's faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul's work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God
This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "God gave them over"
Many scholars view the phrases "God gave them over" and "God gave them up" as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: "obedience of faith," "whom I serve in my spirit," "from faith to faith" and "exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man."
ROM 1 1 x3em figs-explicit Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. You may also need to tell in this same verse who the people are to whom Paul wrote the letter ([Romans 1:7](./07.md)). Alternate translation: "I, Paul, wrote this letter" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "God called me to be an apostle and chose me to tell people about the gospel" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 1 1 sg88 κλητὸς 1 called This means that God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ ROM 1 32 ytu6 figs-explicit ὅτι οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντ ROM 1 32 z12q ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 are deserving of death "deserve to die" ROM 1 32 ama2 αὐτὰ 1 these things "these kinds of evil things" ROM 1 32 iqg1 figs-explicit τοῖς πράσσουσιν 1 who do them Here the verb "do" refers to continuing to do things that are evil. Alternate translation: "who keep on doing evil things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who "judge" other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### "Therefore you are without excuse"
This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Doers of the Law"
Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God's commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### Hypothetical Situation
In context, "he will give eternal life" in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the "letter" of the law but cannot follow the "spirit" or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "You who judge"
At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to "people who judge" he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as "those who judge (and everyone judges)."
+ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who "judge" other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### "Therefore you are without excuse"
This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Doers of the Law"
Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God's commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Hypothetical Situation
In context, "he will give eternal life" in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the "letter" of the law but cannot follow the "spirit" or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "You who judge"
At times, this could be translated in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to "people who judge" he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as "those who judge (and everyone judges)."
ROM 2 1 y6ts 0 Connecting Statement: Paul has affirmed all men are sinners and continues to remind them that all people are wicked. ROM 2 1 d7pj figs-explicit διὸ ἀναπολόγητος εἶ 1 Therefore you are without excuse The word "therefore" marks a new section of the letter. It also makes a concluding statement based on what Paul has said in [Romans 1:1-32](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: "Since God will punish those who continually sin, he will certainly not excuse your sins" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 2 1 x3mi figs-apostrophe εἶ 1 you are Paul is writing here as if he were addressing a Jewish person who is arguing with him. Paul is doing this to teach his audience that God will punish everyone who continually sins, whether Jew or Gentile. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ ROM 2 29 v149 ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 inwardly This refers to the values an ROM 2 29 dk8q figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 of the heart Here "heart" is a metonym for the inner person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 2 29 dd3p figs-synecdoche ἐν ... Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι 1 in the Spirit, not in the letter Here "letter" is a synecdoche that refers to written Scripture. Alternate translation: "through the work of the Holy Spirit, not because you know the Scriptures" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 2 29 qa6b ἐν ... Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit This refers to the internal, spiritual part of a person that "God's Spirit" changes . -ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, "What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?" (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

#### "For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God"
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

#### The purpose of the law of Moses
Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God's law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions
Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]])
+ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, "What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?" (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### "For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God"
Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses
Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God's law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]])
ROM 3 1 v788 0 Connecting Statement: Paul proclaims the advantage that Jews have because God gave them his law. ROM 3 1 gcd6 figs-explicit τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision? Paul presents ideas that people might have after they hear what he wrote in chapter 2. He does this in order to respond to them in verse 2. Alternate translation: "Some people might say, 'Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision?'" or "Some people might say, 'If that is true, then the Jews do not have any advantage, and there is no benefit in being circumcised.'" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 2 rri9 figs-explicit πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 It is great in every way Paul now responds to the concerns brought up in verse 1. Here "It" refers to being a member of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: "But there is great advantage to being a Jew" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ ROM 3 31 wb6r figs-rquestion νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ ROM 3 31 jdq1 figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar express in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: "This is certainly not true" or "Certainly not" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 31 y6qx νόμον ... ἱστάνομεν 1 we uphold the law "we obey the law" ROM 3 31 nzr7 figs-inclusive καταργοῦμεν 1 we This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) -ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The purpose of the law of Moses
Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God's commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### Circumcision
Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The purpose of the law of Moses
Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God's commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Circumcision
Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
ROM 4 1 gw29 0 Connecting Statement: Paul confirms that even in the past believers were made right with God by faith and not by the law. ROM 4 1 gwp3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα 1 What then will we say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, found? Paul uses the question to catch the attention of the reader and to start talking about something new. Alternate translation: "This is what Abraham our physical ancestor found" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 4 3 w9i5 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 For what does the scripture say Paul uses this question to add emphasis. He speaks of the Scriptures as if they were alive and could talk. Alternate translation: "For we can read in the scripture" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ ROM 4 24 pfc9 figs-inclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς 1 for us The word "us" refers to ROM 4 24 nh4k figs-activepassive 0 It was written also for us, for whom it will be counted, we who believe You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "It was also for our benefit, because God will consider us righteous also if we believe" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 24 a6c7 figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 him who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead "Raised ... from the dead" here is an idiom for "caused to live again." Alternate translation: "him who caused Jesus our Lord to live again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 4 25 cca1 figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἠγέρθη διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "whom God gave over to enemies for our trespasses and whom God brought back to life so he could make us right with him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Results of justification
How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

#### "All sinned"
Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: "And death spread to all people, because all sinned." Some believe that all of mankind was present in the "seed of Adam." So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind "fell" as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam's original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

#### The second Adam
Adam was the first man and the first "son" of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the "second Adam" in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
+ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification
How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### "All sinned"
Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: "And death spread to all people, because all sinned." Some believe that all of mankind was present in the "seed of Adam." So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind "fell" as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam's original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam
Adam was the first man and the first "son" of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the "second Adam" in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
ROM 5 1 xmp3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell many different things that happen when God makes believers right with him. ROM 5 1 age4 δικαιωθέντες οὖν 1 Since we are justified "Because we are justified" ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-inclusive 0 we ... our All occurrences of "we" and "our" refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ ROM 5 21 wmy8 figs-personification ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμ ROM 5 21 w4ut figs-personification οὕτως καὶ ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 even so grace might rule through righteousness for everlasting life through Jesus Christ our Lord Paul speaks of "grace" here as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: "grace gave people everlasting life through the righteousness of Jesus Christ our Lord" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 21 m5by figs-personification οὕτως ... ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 so grace might rule through righteousness Paul speaks of "grace" here as if it were a king that ruled. The word "righteousness" refers to God's ability to make people right with him. Alternate translation: "so God might give his free gift to people to make them right with him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 5 21 ew1b figs-inclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 our Lord Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) -ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Against the Law
In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this "antinomianism" or being "against the law." To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

#### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

#### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person's faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Death
Paul uses "death" many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
+ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Against the Law
In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this "antinomianism" or being "against the law." To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Servants of sin
Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fruit
This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person's faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death
Paul uses "death" many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])
ROM 6 1 x13n 0 Connecting Statement: Under grace, Paul tells those who believe in Jesus to live a new life as though dead to sin and alive to God. ROM 6 1 pvg3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 What then will we say? Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? Paul asks these rhetorical questions to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: "So, what should we say about all of this? We certainly should not keep on sinning so that God will give us more and more grace! (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 6 1 fj9e figs-inclusive ἐροῦμεν 1 we say The pronoun "we" refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ ROM 6 22 npf3 figs-metaphor ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν εἰς ROM 6 22 a478 τὸ δὲ τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 The result is eternal life "The result of all of this is that you will live forever with God" ROM 6 23 ze3f τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 For the wages of sin are death The word "wages" refers to a payment given to someone for their work. "For if you serve sin, you will receive spiritual death as payment" or "For if you continue sinning, God will punish you with spiritual death" ROM 6 23 pf3s τὸ δὲ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιος ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 but the gift of God is eternal life in Christ Jesus our Lord "but God gives eternal life to those who belong to Christ Jesus our Lord" -ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### "Or do you not know"
Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "We have been released from the law"
Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Marriage
Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh
This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### "Or do you not know"
Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "We have been released from the law"
Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Marriage
Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
ROM 7 1 nj1k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how the law controls those who want to live under the law. ROM 7 1 mk7w figs-rquestion 0 do you not know, brothers ... that the law controls a person for as long as he lives? Paul asks this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: "So you certainly know that people have to obey laws only while they are alive" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 7 1 r9fl ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me "rescue me" ROM 7 24 md8e figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 this body of death This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 25 w9ui χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 But thanks be to God through Jesus Christ our Lord This is the answer to the question in 7:24. ROM 7 25 adx1 figs-metaphor ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 So then, I myself serve the law of God with my mind. However, with the flesh I serve the principle of sin The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either God's law or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: "My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Indwelling of the Spirit
The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

#### "These are sons of God"
Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

#### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### No condemnation
This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word "condemn" has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being "condemned to hell." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

#### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
+ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit
The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### "These are sons of God"
Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation
This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word "condemn" has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being "condemned to hell." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
ROM 8 1 xq2y 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good. ROM 8 1 xw65 figs-explicit οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus Here "condemnation" refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: "God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore "for that reason" or "because what I have just told you is true" @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ ROM 8 37 wcm6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced "I am convinced" or "I am confident" ROM 8 38 js9q ἀρχαὶ 1 governments Possible meanings are 1) demons or 2) human kings and rulers. ROM 8 38 q7ti οὔτε ... δυνάμεις 1 nor powers Possible meanings are 1) spiritual beings with power or 2) human beings with power. -ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Flesh
Paul uses the word "flesh" in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word "brother" to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses "my brothers" to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as "children of God" and "children of the promise."

#### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

#### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Stone of stumbling
Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This "stone of stumbling" causes them to "fall." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel"
Paul uses the word "Israel" in this verse with two different meanings. The first "Israel" means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second "Israel" means those who are God's people through faith. The UST reflects this.
+ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh
Paul uses the word "flesh" in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word "brother" to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses "my brothers" to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as "children of God" and "children of the promise."

### Predestination
Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling
Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This "stone of stumbling" causes them to "fall." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel"
Paul uses the word "Israel" in this verse with two different meanings. The first "Israel" means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second "Israel" means those who are God's people through faith. The UST reflects this.
ROM 9 1 b89f 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe. ROM 9 1 yg93 figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit "the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say" @@ -681,7 +681,7 @@ ROM 9 33 kx9c figs-explicit καθὼς γέγραπται 1 as it has been writ ROM 9 33 dy6x figs-metonymy ἐν Σιὼν 1 in Zion Here Zion is a metonym that represents Israel. Alternate translation: "in Israel" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 9 33 u3dj figs-doublet λίθον προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτραν σκανδάλου 1 stone of stumbling and a rock of offense Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing and are metaphors that refer to Jesus and his death on the cross. It was as if the people stumbled over a stone because they were disgusted when they considered Jesus' death on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 9 33 tu4i καὶ ... ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 believes in it Because the stone stands for a person, you may need to translate "believes in him." -ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### God's righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God's righteousness. God gives us Jesus' righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation"

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM 10 intro c2li 0 # Romans 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 18-20 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God's righteousness

Paul teaches here that while many Jews earnestly tried to be righteous, they did not succeed. We cannot earn God's righteousness. God gives us Jesus' righteousness when we believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He does this to convince his readers that God does not save only the Hebrew people, so Christians must be ready to go and share the gospel with the whole world. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "I will provoke you to jealousy by what is not a nation"

Paul uses this prophecy to explain that God will use the church to make the Hebrew people jealous. This is so they will seek God and believe the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/jealous]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 10 1 pi37 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues stating his desire for Israel to believe but emphasizes that both those who are Jews as well as everyone else can only be saved by faith in Jesus. ROM 10 1 hj4b ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. ROM 10 1 tq7k figs-metonymy 0 my heart's desire Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's emotions or inner being. Alternate translation: "my greatest desire" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ ROM 10 20 t78j ἐμφανὴς ἐγενόμην 1 I appeared "I made myself k ROM 10 20 k8pp λέγει 1 he says "He" refers to God, who is speaking through Isaiah. ROM 10 21 hw4w ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 All the day long This phrase is used to emphasize God's continual effort. "continually" ROM 10 21 il8s ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ ἀντιλέγοντα 1 I reached out my hands to a disobedient and stubborn people "I tried to welcome you and to help you, but you refused my help and continued to disobey" -ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Grafting
Paul uses the image of "grafting" to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called "grafting." Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Did God reject his people? May it never be"

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])
+ROM 11 intro e9qz 0 # Romans 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-10, 26-27, and 34-35, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Grafting
Paul uses the image of "grafting" to refer to the place of the Gentiles and Jews in the plans of God. Making one plant to be permanently part of another plant is called "grafting." Paul uses the picture of God grafting the Gentiles as a wild branch into his saving plans. But God has not forgotten about the Jews, who are spoken of as the natural plant. God will also save Jews who believe in Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Did God reject his people? May it never be"

Whether Israel (the physical descendants of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob) has a future in the plans of God, or if they have been replaced in the plans of God by the church, is a major theological issue in Chapters 9-11. This phrase is an important part of this section of Romans. It seems to indicate that Israel remains distinct from the church. Not all scholars arrive at this conclusion. Despite their currently rejecting Jesus as their Messiah, Israel has not exhausted the grace and mercy of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/mercy]])
ROM 11 1 p2h9 0 Connecting Statement: Though Israel as a nation has rejected God, God wants them to understand salvation comes by grace without works. ROM 11 1 wp35 λέγω οὖν 1 I say then "I, Paul, say then" ROM 11 1 p4zd figs-rquestion μὴ ἀπώσατο ὁ Θεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 did God reject his people? Paul asks this question so that he can answer the questions of other Jews who are upset that God has included the Gentiles among his people, while the hearts of the Jewish people have been hardened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ ROM 11 34 r2wj figs-rquestion τίς” γὰρ" ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίο ROM 11 34 yy52 figs-metonymy νοῦν Κυρίου 1 the mind of the Lord Here "mind" is a metonym for knowing things or thinking about things. Alternate translation: "all that the Lord knows" or "what the Lord thinks about" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 11 35 j5cn figs-rquestion ἢ τίς προέδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 Or who has first given anything to God, that God must repay him?" Paul uses this question to emphasize his point. Alternate translation: "No one has ever given anything to God that he did not first receive from God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) * **For from him ... through him ... to him** - Here, all occurrences of "him" refers to God. ROM 11 36 rpx6 figs-explicit αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 To him be the glory forever This expresses Paul's desire for all people to honor God. You can make this explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: "May all people honor him forever" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word "therefore" in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one's Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Christian living
Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Body of Christ
The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ROM 12 intro aky9 0 # Romans 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 20, which are from the Old Testament.

Many scholars believe Paul uses the word "therefore" in [Romans 12:1](../../rom/12/01.md) to refer back to all of Chapters 1-11. Having carefully explained the Christian gospel, Paul now explains how Christians should live in light of these great truths. Chapters 12-16 focus on living out one's Christian faith. Paul uses many different commands in these chapters to give these practical instructions. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian living
Under the law of Moses, people were required to offer temple sacrifices of animals or grain. Now Christians are required to live their lives as a type of sacrifice to God. Physical sacrifices are no longer required. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Body of Christ
The body of Christ is an important metaphor or image used in Scripture to refer to the church. Each church member plays a unique and important function. Christians need each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 1 rhs3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells what the life of a believer should be and how believers should serve. ROM 12 1 d2y3 figs-explicit παρακαλῶ οὖν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 I urge you therefore, brothers, by the mercies of God Here "brothers" refers to fellow believers, both male and female. Alternate translation: "Fellow believers, because of the great mercy that God has given you I very much want you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 12 1 w1mz figs-synecdoche παραστῆσαι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν θυσίαν ζῶσαν 1 to present your bodies a living sacrifice Here Paul uses the word "bodies" to refer to the whole person. Paul is comparing a believer in Christ who completely obeys God to the animals that the Jews killed and then offered to God. Alternate translation: "to offer yourselves completely to God while you are alive as if you were a dead sacrifice on a temple altar" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ ROM 12 20 e49j ψώμιζε αὐτόν 1 feed him "give him some food" ROM 12 20 wce6 figs-metaphor ἄνθρακας πυρὸς σωρεύσεις ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ 1 heap coals of fire on his head Paul speaks of the blessings that the enemies will receive as if someone were pouring hot coals on their heads. Possible meanings are 1) "make the person who harmed you feel badly about how he has mistreated you" or 2) "give God a reason to judge your enemy more harshly." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 12 21 q761 figs-personification μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ἐν τῷ ἀγαθῷ τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil with good Paul describes "evil" as though it were a person. You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "Do not let those who are evil defeat you, but defeat those who are evil by doing what is good" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 12 21 p7fd figs-you μὴ νικῶ ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, ἀλλὰ νίκα ... τὸ κακόν 1 Do not be overcome by evil, but overcome evil These verbs are addressed as to one person and so are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Ungodly rulers
When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 13 intro l4q7 0 # Romans 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In the first part of this chapter, Paul teaches Christians to obey rulers who govern them. At that time, ungodly Roman rulers governed the land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly rulers
When Paul teaches about obeying rulers, some readers will find this difficult to understand, especially in places where rulers persecute the church. Christians must obey their rulers as well as obey God, unless the rulers do not allow Christians to do something God explicitly commands them to do. There are times when a believer must submit to these rulers and suffer at their hands. Christians understand that this world is temporary and they will ultimately be with God forever. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 13 1 v5ik 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells believers how to live under their rulers. ROM 13 1 b8nf figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ ἐξουσίαις ... ὑποτασσέσθω 1 Let every soul be obedient to Here "soul" is a synecdoche for the whole person. "Every Christian should obey" or "Everyone should obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 13 1 g1by ἐξουσίαις ὑπερεχούσαις 1 higher authorities "government officials" @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ ROM 13 13 g117 ζήλῳ 1 jealousy This refers to negative feelings against an ROM 13 14 sir6 figs-metaphor ἐνδύσασθε τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν 1 put on the Lord Jesus Christ Paul speaks of accepting the moral nature of Christ as if he were our outer clothing that people can see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 13 14 j795 ἐνδύσασθε 1 put on If your language has a plural form for commands, use it here. ROM 13 14 xre7 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς πρόνοιαν μὴ ποιεῖσθε 1 make no provision for the flesh Here the "flesh" refers to the self-directed nature of people who oppose God. This is the sinful nature of human beings. Alternate translation: "do not allow your old evil heart any opportunity at all for doing wicked things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ROM 14 intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Weak in faith

Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be "weak in faith" in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### Dietary restrictions

Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

#### The judgment seat of God

The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
+ROM 14 intro kt8c 0 # Romans 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 11 of this chapter, which Paul quotes from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Weak in faith

Paul teaches that Christians can have real faith and at the same time be "weak in faith" in a given situation. This describes Christians whose faith is immature, not strong, or misunderstood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Dietary restrictions

Many religions in the ancient Near East restricted what was eaten. Christians have freedom to eat what they want. But they need to use this freedom wisely, in a way that honors the Lord and does not cause others to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### The judgment seat of God

The judgment seat of God or Christ represents a time when all people, including Christians, will be held accountable for the way they lived their lives.
ROM 14 1 abm6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages believers to remember that they are answerable to God. ROM 14 1 jf8v τὸν δὲ ἀσθενοῦντα τῇ πίστει 1 weak in faith This refers to those who felt guilty over eating and drinking certain things. ROM 14 1 p697 μὴ εἰς διακρίσεις διαλογισμῶν 1 without giving judgment about arguments "and do not condemn them for their opinions" @@ -983,7 +983,7 @@ ROM 14 22 r53r μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτὸν ἐν ᾧ ROM 14 23 s1ph figs-activepassive 0 He who doubts is condemned if he eats You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: "God will say that the person does wrong if he is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but he eats it anyway" or "The person who is not sure if it is right to eat a certain food, but then eats it anyway will have a troubled conscience" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 14 23 yr44 figs-explicit ὅτι οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως 1 because it is not from faith Anything that is "not from faith" is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: "God will say that he is wrong because he is eating something he believes God does not want him to eat" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 14 23 tr9i figs-explicit πᾶν δὲ ὃ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως, ἁμαρτία ἐστίν 1 whatever is not from faith is sin Anything that is "not from faith" is something that God does not want you to do. You can make explicit the full meaning here. Alternate translation: "you are sinning if you do something that you do not believe God wants you to do" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Strong/Weak
These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
+ROM 15 intro ae9u 0 # Romans 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 9-11 and 21 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set prose quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 12.

In [Romans 15:14](../../rom/15/14.md), Paul begins to speak more personally. He shifts from teaching to telling of his personal plans.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Strong/Weak
These terms are used to refer to people who are mature and immature in their faith. Paul teaches that those who are strong in faith need to help those who are weak in faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
ROM 15 1 cx66 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes this section about believers' living for others with reminding them how Christ lived. ROM 15 1 u19s δὲ 1 Now Translate this using the words your language uses to introduce a new idea into an argument. ROM 15 1 u73x figs-explicit ἡμεῖς, οἱ δυνατοὶ 1 we who are strong Here "strong" refers to the people who are strong in their faith. They believe that God allows them to eat any kind of food. Alternate translation: "we who are strong in faith" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1049,7 +1049,7 @@ ROM 15 30 fy1v συναγωνίσασθαί 1 you strive "you work hard" or "yo ROM 15 31 u7st figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀπειθούντων 1 I may be rescued from those who are disobedient This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God may rescue me from those who are disobedient" or "God may keep those who are disobedient from harming me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 15 31 nw5h figs-explicit 0 that my service for Jerusalem may be acceptable to the believers Here Paul expresses his desire that the believers in Jerusalem will gladly accept the money from the believers in Macedonia and Achaia. Alternate translation: "pray that the believers in Jerusalem will be glad to receive the money that I am bringing them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 15 33 s947 figs-explicit ὁ δὲ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης μετὰ 1 May the God of peace The "God of peace" means the God who causes believers to have inner peace. Alternate translation: "I pray that God who causes all of us to have inner peace" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 16 intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ROM 16 intro qy96 0 # Romans 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul gives personal greetings to some of the Christians in Rome. It was common to end a letter in the ancient Near East with this type of personal greeting.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

Because of the personal nature of this chapter, much of the context is unknown. This will make translation more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ROM 16 1 sg6a 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then greets many of the believers in Rome by name. ROM 16 1 vkg8 συνίστημι δὲ ὑμῖν Φοίβην 1 I commend to you Phoebe "I want you to respect Phoebe" ROM 16 1 sry4 translate-names Φοίβην 1 Phoebe This is a woman's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index e57ddfe50..c72940f9b 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women's head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul's rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord's Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "First Corinthians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's First Letter to the Church in Corinth." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses "holy," "holy God," "holy ones," or "holy people." (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses "believer" or "believers." (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "set apart," "dedicated to," "reserved for," or "sanctified." (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of "flesh?"

Paul frequently used the terms "flesh" or "fleshly" to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as "spiritual." This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, "those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus" (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators' region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.

* "Therefore glorify God with your body." Some older versions read "Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God's." (6:20)
* "I did this even though I myself was not under the law" (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* "for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man." Some older versions read "for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man." (10:28)
* "and that I give my body to be burned" (13:3). Some older versions read, "and that I give my body so that I might boast."
* "But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized" (14:38). Some older versions read, "But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant."


(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Disunity
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

#### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: "the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ" and "the day of our Lord Jesus Christ." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Stumbling block
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: "the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ" and "the day of our Lord Jesus Christ." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Stumbling block
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 1 1 e8j3 Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Alternate translation: "I, Paul" 1CO 1 1 qp1n translate-names Σωσθένης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Sosthenes our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Sosthenes. Alternate translation: "Sosthenes the brother you and I know" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 1 2 r9kg τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ ... ἐν ... Κορίνθῳ 1 to the church of God at Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the intended audience. Alternate translation: "wrote this letter to you in Corinth who believe in God" @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 30 a7bs figs-inclusive 0 us ... our These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1CO 1 30 f1at figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 Christ Jesus, who became for us wisdom from God Possible meanings are 1) "Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is" or 2) "Christ Jesus, who has given us God's wisdom." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 1 31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord "If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is" -1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Wisdom
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God's wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase "hidden wisdom" when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
+1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wisdom
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God's wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase "hidden wisdom" when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])
1CO 2 1 kjc7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul contrasts human wisdom and God's wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God. 1CO 2 1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 2 2 a2g9 figs-hyperbole 0 I decided to know nothing ... except Jesus Christ When Paul said that he "decided to know nothing" he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: "I decided to teach nothing ... except Jesus Christ" or "I decided not to teach anything ... except Jesus Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 14 gwe3 ὅτι πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 because they are spiritually discerned "because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit" 1CO 2 15 w4q7 ὁ ... πνευματικὸς 1 The one who is spiritual "The believer who has received the Spirit" 1CO 2 16 m4pu figs-rquestion 0 For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him? Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows the mind of the Lord. No one is as wise as the Lord. Alternate translation: "No one can know the mind of the Lord, so no one can teach him anything he does not already know" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Fleshly people
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them "fleshly," meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are "spiritual." Christians following their "flesh" are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses "babies" and "milk" to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fleshly people
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them "fleshly," meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are "spiritual." Christians following their "flesh" are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses "babies" and "milk" to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 1 a43d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now reminds the Corinthian believers of how they are actually living instead of behaving as their position before God is. He then reminds them that the person who teaches them is not as important as God who gives their growth. 1CO 3 1 r4iw ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 3 1 jx17 πνευματικοῖς 1 spiritual people people who obey the Spirit @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 20 la6x Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι 1 The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile "The Lord knows that what people who think they are wise plan to do is futile" 1CO 3 20 kz2u μάταιοι 1 futile useless 1CO 3 23 nj48 0 you are Christ's, and Christ is God's "you belong to Christ, and Christ belongs to God" -1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 04 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Pride
Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their "spiritual father." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

#### Irony
Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pride
Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their "spiritual father." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Irony
Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 4 1 k1v5 0 Connecting Statement: Having just reminded the people not to be proud concerning who taught them about the Lord and who had baptized them, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that all believers are to be humble servants. 1CO 4 2 th8e figs-123person 0 what is required of stewards Paul is speaking of himself as if he were speaking about other people. Alternate translation: "we are required to be" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 4 3 k6nc 0 it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you Paul is comparing the difference between human judgment and God's judgment. Man's judgment is not important compared to God's true judgment upon man. @@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 21 ix5g figs-rquestion τί θέλετε 1 What do you want? Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: "Tell me what you want to happen now" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 wv61 figs-rquestion 0 Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: "If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 ix7l πραΰτητος 1 of gentleness "of kindness" or "of tenderness" -1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

#### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don't you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Metaphor
Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don't you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 5 1 e66c 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin. 1CO 5 1 dlj2 figs-activepassive 0 that is not even permitted among the Gentiles This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that not even the Gentiles permit" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 5 1 b9xn 0 A man has his father's wife "A man among you is commiting adultery with his father's wife" @@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 5 11 b4us ἀδελφὸς 1 brother Here this means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman. 1CO 5 12 xeu7 figs-rquestion 0 how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church? Paul is emphasizing that he is not the one to judge people outside the church. This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 5 12 m4s6 figs-rquestion 0 are you not to judge those who are inside the church? Paul is scolding the Corinthians. "you should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor
The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 6 1 hv79 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers. 1CO 6 1 q5d3 πρᾶγμα 1 dispute disagreement or argument 1CO 6 1 gmy5 figs-rquestion 0 does he dare to go ... saints? Paul is emphasizing that Christians must resolve disagreements among themselves. Alternate translation: "he should not dare to go ... saints!" or "he should be fear God and not go ... saints!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 19 d2mc figs-metaphor ναὸς τοῦ ... Ἁγίου Πνεύματός 1 temple of the Holy Spirit A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer's body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 6 20 qv47 figs-activepassive 0 For you were bought with a price God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "God paid for your freedom" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 20 y7fe δὴ 1 Therefore "Because what I have just said is true" -1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Divorce
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Euphemisms
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
+1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1CO 7 1 iue7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage. 1CO 7 1 y4lx δὲ 1 Now Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching. 1CO 7 1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 the issues you wrote about The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions. @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 40 hwz4 τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην 1 my judgment "my understanding of God's word" 1CO 7 40 hd7f μακαριωτέρα 1 happier more contented, more joyful 1CO 7 40 pse4 0 lives as she is "remains unmarried" -1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Meat sacrificed to idols
Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
+1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Meat sacrificed to idols
Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
1CO 8 1 jf6h figs-inclusive 0 General Information: "We" means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1CO 8 1 nzt4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ. 1CO 8 1 cep1 περὶ δὲ 1 Now about Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him. @@ -393,7 +393,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 11 g5tn 0 the weaker one ... is destroyed The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith. 1CO 8 13 i8tb διόπερ 1 Therefore "Because what I have just said is true" 1CO 8 13 vf92 figs-metonymy εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει 1 if food causes "Food" here is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: "if I cause by eating" or "if I, because of what I eat, cause" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Earning money from the church
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Contextualization
This passage is important because Paul "contextualizes" ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this "contextualization" if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Earning money from the church
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Contextualization
This passage is important because Paul "contextualizes" ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this "contextualization" if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 9 1 fu7x 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ. 1CO 9 1 mdm4 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος 1 Am I not free? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: "I am a free person." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 1 dbp9 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ... ἀπόστολος 1 Am I not an apostle? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: "I am an apostle." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 25 bfe4 figs-metaphor 0 a wreath that is perishable ... one that is imperishable A wreath is a bunch of leaves twisted together. Wreaths were given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were a wreath that would never dry up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 26 k64n figs-metaphor 0 I do not run without purpose or box by beating the air Here "running" and "boxing" are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God. This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "I know very well why I am running, and I know what I am doing when I box" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 9 27 blb7 figs-activepassive μή ... αὐτὸς ἀδόκιμος γένωμαι 1 I myself may not be disqualified This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: "the judge will not disqualify me" or "God will not say that I have failed to obey the rules" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"

In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord's Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Exodus
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

#### Eating meat sacrificed to idol
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don't eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
+1CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 1 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"

In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then, he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord's Supper as an example. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Exodus
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, they all died on the way. None of them reached the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### Eating meat sacrificed to idol
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but it may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don't eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
1CO 10 1 r66h 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers' experiences with immorality and idolatry. 1CO 10 1 g34f figs-inclusive οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. The word "our" refers to himself and the Corinthians and is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1CO 10 1 v4c6 διὰ τῆς θαλάσσης διῆλθον 1 passed through the sea This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds. @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 kj14 0 please all people "make all people glad" 1CO 10 33 b4jv 0 I do not seek my benefit "I do not do things I desire for myself" 1CO 10 33 hd2z τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many as many people as possible -1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord's Supper (verses 17-34).

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Proper conduct in a church service

#### Disorderly women
Paul's instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

#### The Lord's Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord's Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord's Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ's death if they participated in the Lord's Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

#### The head

Paul uses "head" as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person's actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used "head" in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord's Supper (verses 17-34).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Proper conduct in a church service

### Disorderly women
Paul's instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.

### The Lord's Supper
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord's Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord's Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ's death if they participated in the Lord's Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The head

Paul uses "head" as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person's actual head in verse 4 and following. Since they are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used "head" in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses were connected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1CO 11 1 h5fg 0 Connecting Statement: After reminding them to follow him the way he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructs in how women and men are to live as believers. 1CO 11 2 qsk9 πάντα μου μέμνησθε 1 you remember me in everything "you think of me at all times" or "you always try act as I would want you to act" The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them. 1CO 11 3 k5um θέλω δὲ 1 Now I want Possible meanings are 1) "Because of this, I want" or 2) "However, I want." @@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 33 nky5 ἀλλήλους ἐκδέχεσθε 1 wait for one another "allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal" 1CO 11 34 v2uh ἐν οἴκῳ ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home "let him eat before attending this gathering" 1CO 11 34 x1l8 figs-metonymy 0 it will not be for judgment "it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### Gifts of the Holy Spirit

This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The Church, the body of Christ

This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "No one can say, 'Jesus is Lord,' except by the Holy Spirit."
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word "Lord" for the word "Yahweh." This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit's influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
+1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### Gifts of the Holy Spirit

This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Church, the body of Christ

This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The Church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "No one can say, 'Jesus is Lord,' except by the Holy Spirit."
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word "Lord" for the word "Yahweh." This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit's influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
1CO 12 1 da2e 0 Connecting Statement: Paul lets them know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers. 1CO 12 1 i3k7 figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλω ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 I do not want you to be uninformed This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: "I want you to know" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1CO 12 2 hbt8 figs-metaphor 0 you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them Here "led astray" is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. The phrases "were led astray" and "you were led by them" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak" or "you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 30 d3k8 figs-rquestion πάντες ... διερμηνεύουσιν 1 Do all of them interpret tongues? This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "Not all of them interpret tongues." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 12 30 ab9e διερμηνεύουσιν 1 interpret This means to tell what someone has said in a language to others who do not understand that language. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 2:13](../02/13.md). 1CO 12 31 vb1m ζηλοῦτε ... τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα 1 Zealously seek the greater gifts. Possible meanings are 1) "You must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church." or 2) "You are eagerly looking for gifts that you think are greater because you think they are more exciting to have." -1CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Love

Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 1 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts. However, this chapter probably serves a larger function in his teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Love

Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1CO 13 1 n8lm 0 Connecting Statement: Having just talked about the gifts that God gave to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important. 1CO 13 1 cm2n figs-hyperbole 0 the tongues of ... angels Possible meanings are 1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use or 2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 13 1 k2gk figs-metaphor γέγονα χαλκὸς ἠχῶν ἢ κύμβαλον ἀλαλάζον 1 I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal I have become like instruments that make loud, annoying sounds (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 12 qp7g figs-ellipsis ἐπιγνώσομαι 1 I will know fully The word "Christ" is understood. Alternate translation: "I will know Christ fully" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 13 12 i28w figs-activepassive καθὼς ... ἐπεγνώσθην 1 just as I have been fully known This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "just as Christ has known me fully" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 13 13 nt1y figs-abstractnouns 0 faith, future confidence, and love These abstract nouns can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: "we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.

Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Tongues

Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.

#### Prophecy

Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
+1CO 14 intro abch 0 # 1 Corinthians 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.

Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the words of verse 21.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Tongues

Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.

### Prophecy

Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])
1CO 14 1 vl57 0 Connecting Statement: Paul wants them to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love. 1CO 14 1 x938 figs-123person διώκετε τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Pursue love Paul speaks of love as if it were a person. "Follow after love" or "Work hard to love people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 14 1 ki3l μᾶλλον ... ἵνα προφητεύητε 1 especially that you may prophesy "and work especially hard to be able to prophesy" @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 38 l68a figs-activepassive 0 let him not be recognized This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you should not recognize him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 39 jvr7 0 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable. 1CO 14 40 d7ia πάντα δὲ εὐσχημόνως καὶ κατὰ τάξιν γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. Alternate translation: "But do all things properly and in order" or "But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way" -1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### Resurrection
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Resurrection
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
+1CO 15 intro abci 0 # 1 Corinthians 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### Resurrection
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that a person could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Resurrection
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many who God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
1CO 15 1 gc6n 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson, which ends with what will yet happen. 1CO 15 1 la9v 0 remind you "help you remember" 1CO 15 1 xv53 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ ... ἑστήκατε 1 on which you stand Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -807,7 +807,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 58 k4c4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them. 1CO 15 58 j1pl figs-metaphor 0 be steadfast and immovable Paul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from carrying out his decisions as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: "be determined" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 58 zn8f figs-metaphor περισσεύοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ τοῦ Κυρίου πάντοτε 1 Always abound in the work of the Lord Paul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: "Always work for the Lord faithfully" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Preparation for his coming

Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
+1CO 16 intro abcj 0 # 1 Corinthians 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Preparation for his coming

Paul gave practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He told them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hoped to come and spend the winter with them. He told them to help Timothy when he came. He had hoped Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also told them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sent his greetings to everyone.
1CO 16 1 zh6u 0 Connecting Statement: In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem. He reminds them that Timothy will come to them before he goes to Paul. 1CO 16 1 yer5 0 for the believers Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea. 1CO 16 1 kh6h ὥσπερ διέταξα 1 as I directed "as I gave specific instructions" diff --git a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv index 779312b74..bafa9eb0c 100644 --- a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Second Corinthians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Second Letter to the Church in Corinth." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by "false apostles" (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural "you"

In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. Also, the word "you" is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses "holy," "holy God," "holy ones," or "holy people."

* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses "believer" or "believers." (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)

* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "set apart," "dedicated to," "reserved for," or "sanctified."

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like "in Christ" and "in the Lord"?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, "A door was opened for me in the Lord," (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a "new creation" in Christ (5:17)?

Paul's message was that God makes Christians part of a "new world" when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?

* "and in your love for us" (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, "and in our love for you." There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

### Special Concepts

#### Paul's integrity
People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

#### Comfort
Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### We
Paul uses the pronoun "we". This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

#### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian's eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God's given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a "guarantee" that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul's integrity
People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort
Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We
Paul uses the pronoun "we". This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian's eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God's given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a "guarantee" that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
2CO 1 1 epd2 0 General Information: After Paul's greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word "you" throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says. 2CO 1 1 mel3 0 Paul ... to the church of God that is in Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: "I, Paul ... wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth" 2CO 1 1 f59u Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Timothy our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Timothy and considered him to be their spiritual brother. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 1 23 j15t 0 so that I might spare you "so that I might not cause you more suffering" 2CO 1 24 cyu4 0 we are working with you for your joy "we are working with you so that you may have joy" 2CO 1 24 cih8 figs-idiom 0 stand in your faith The word "stand" can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: "remain firm in your faith" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 02 General Notes
### Special Concepts

#### Harsh writing
In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Aroma
A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma.
+2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 02 General Notes
## Special Concepts

### Harsh writing
In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Aroma
A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma.
2CO 2 1 wh9c 0 Connecting Statement: Because of his great love for them, Paul makes it clear that his rebuke in his first letter to them (the rebuke of their acceptance of the sin of immorality) caused him pain as well as pain to the church people in Corinth and the immoral man. 2CO 2 1 x9s5 0 I decided for my own part "I made the decision" 2CO 2 1 ij73 0 in painful circumstances "in circumstances that would cause you pain" @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 2 17 u2zb ἐν Χριστῷ λαλοῦμεν 1 we speak in Christ "we speak as people who are joined to Christ" or "we speak with the authority of Christ" 2CO 2 17 yg3k figs-activepassive 0 as we are sent from God This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "as people whom God has sent" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 2 17 q4dc figs-ellipsis κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 in the sight of God Paul and his coworkers preach the gospel with the awareness that God is watching them. Alternate translation: "we speak in the presence of God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Law of Moses
Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul's teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit."
Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here "Spirit" probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being "spiritual" in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
+2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Law of Moses
Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors
Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul's teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit."
Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here "Spirit" probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being "spiritual" in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
2CO 3 1 m1k8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that he is not boasting as he tells them about what he has done through Christ. 2CO 3 1 um8x figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Are we beginning to praise ourselves again? Paul uses this question to emphasize that they are not bragging about themselves. Alternate translation: "We are not beginning to praise ourselves again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2CO 3 1 y8yc figs-rquestion 0 We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we? Paul says this to express that the Corinthians already know about Paul and Timothy's good reputation. The question prompts a negative answer. Alternate translation: "We certainly do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people do" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 3 18 rc9x figs-activepassive 0 We are being transformed into the same glorious likeness The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like him. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 3 18 bx5b 0 from one degree of glory into another "from one amount of glory to another amount of glory." This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the glory of believers. 2CO 3 18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ Κυρίου 1 just as from the Lord "just as this comes from the Lord" -2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting
This chapter begins with the word "therefore." This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Life and death
Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Hope
Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])
+2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins with the word "therefore." This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Life and death
Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hope
Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])
2CO 4 1 lyi4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul writes that he is honest in his ministry by preaching Christ, not praising himself. He shows the death and the life of Jesus in how he lives so that life can work in the Corinthian believers. 2CO 4 1 ix7n figs-exclusive 0 we have this ministry Here the word "we" refers to Paul and his coworker, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2CO 4 1 h1ud figs-explicit 0 and just as we have received mercy This phrase explains how Paul and his coworkers "have this ministry." It is a gift that God has given to them through his mercy. Alternate translation: "because God has shown us mercy" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 4 17 na9y figs-metaphor 0 that exceeds all measurement The glory that Paul will experience is so heavy that no one can measure it. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that no one can measure" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 t2fp figs-activepassive 0 things that are seen ... things that are unseen This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "things that we can see ... things that we cannot see" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 f97x figs-ellipsis 0 but for things that are unseen You can supply the verb for this phrase. AT "but we are watching for things that are unseen" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### New bodies in heaven
Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term "old" probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The "new creation" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Home
The Christian's home is no longer in the world. A Christian's real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian's circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The message of reconciliation"
This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])
+2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### New bodies in heaven
Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term "old" probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The "new creation" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Home
The Christian's home is no longer in the world. A Christian's real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian's circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The message of reconciliation"
This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])
2CO 5 1 p7b7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues by contrasting believers' earthly bodies to the heavenly ones God will give. 2CO 5 1 z4vs figs-metaphor 0 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from God Here a temporary "earthly dwelling" is a metaphor for a person's physical body. Here a permanent "building from God" is a metaphor for the new body that God will give believers after they die. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2CO 5 1 zy2k figs-activepassive 0 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "if people destroy the earthly dwelling that we live in" or "if people kill our bodies" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 5 21 ebz2 0 He is the one who never sinned "Christ is the one who never sinned" 2CO 5 21 zm9e 0 He did this ... the righteousness of God in him "God did this ... the righteousness of God in Christ" 2CO 5 21 kmt9 figs-explicit 0 so that we might become the righteousness of God in him The phrase "the righteousness of God" refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: "so that we might have God's righteousness in us through Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Servants
Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

#### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
+2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Servants
Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Rhetorical questions
Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.
2CO 6 1 in53 0 General Information: In verse 2, Paul quotes a portion from the prophet Isaiah. 2CO 6 1 kf1d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be. 2CO 6 1 tbr6 figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Working together Paul is implying that he and Timothy are working with God. Alternate translation: "Working together with God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 6 17 fe1z 0 General Information: Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel. 2CO 6 17 z5ld figs-activepassive ἀφορίσθητε 1 be set apart This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "set yourselves apart" or "allow me to set you apart" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 6 17 c8jq figs-doublenegatives 0 Touch no unclean thing This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: "Touch only things that are clean" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus' return and the comfort it brought.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Clean and unclean

Christians are "clean" in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

#### Sadness and sorrow
The words "sad" and "sorrow" in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

#### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus' return and the comfort it brought.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Clean and unclean

Christians are "clean" in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Sadness and sorrow
The words "sad" and "sorrow" in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2CO 7 1 e7t9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be separated from sin and to seek holiness purposefully. 2CO 7 1 h5xv ἀγαπητοί 1 Loved ones "You whom I love" or "Dear friends" 2CO 7 1 fv49 0 let us cleanse ourselves Here Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect one's relationship with God. @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 7 15 d87j figs-abstractnouns 0 the obedience of all of you This noun "obedience" can be stated with a verb, "obey." Alternate translation: "how all of you obeyed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 7 15 g9bz figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 you welcomed him with fear and trembling Here "fear" and "trembling" share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: "you welcomed him with great reverence" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2CO 7 15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 with fear and trembling Possible meanings are 1) "with great reverence for God" or 2) "with great reverence for Titus." -2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Gift to the church in Jerusalem

The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

#### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: "the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity." In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](./02.md))
+2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gift to the church in Jerusalem

The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun "we" to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: "the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity." In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](./02.md))
2CO 8 1 mm8g 0 Connecting Statement: Having explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving. 2CO 8 1 d1mj figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 8 2 fsq8 figs-personification 0 the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity Paul speaks of "joy" and "poverty" as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: "because of the people's great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 8 23 lat3 0 As for our brothers This refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. 2CO 8 23 u8lx figs-activepassive 0 they are sent by the churches This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the churches have sent them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 8 23 a8v2 figs-abstractnouns 0 They are an honor to Christ This can be stated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: "They will cause people to honor Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 09 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
+2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
2CO 9 1 rd2g translate-names 0 General Information: When Paul refers to Achaia, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2CO 9 1 wc5l 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God. 2CO 9 1 fxs3 figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 the ministry for the believers This refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 9 13 plj4 figs-activepassive 0 Because of your being tested and proved by this service This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Because this service has tested and proven you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 9 13 ze14 0 you will also glorify God by obedience ... by the generosity of your gift to them and to everyone Paul says that the Corinthians will glorify God both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need. 2CO 9 15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 for his inexpressible gift "for his gift, which words cannot describe." Possible meanings are 1) that this gift refers to "the very great grace" that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous or 2) that this gift refers to Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers. -2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.

In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Boasting
"Boasting" is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter "boasting" means confidently exulting or rejoicing.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh

"Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
+2CO 10 intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.

In this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Boasting
"Boasting" is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter "boasting" means confidently exulting or rejoicing.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

In verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

"Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
2CO 10 1 yc1g 0 Connecting Statement: Paul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does. 2CO 10 1 gq7j figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 by the humility and gentleness of Christ The word "humility" and "gentleness" are abstract nouns, and can be expressed in another way. Alternate translation: "I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 10 2 i6hh 0 who assume that "who think that" @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 10 18 h81t ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων 1 recommends himself This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how "recommend ourselves" is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). 2CO 10 18 n5v6 figs-activepassive 0 who is approved This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom the Lord approves" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 10 18 sy2r figs-ellipsis 0 it is the one whom the Lord recommends You can make clear the understood information. Alternate translation: "the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### False teaching
The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

#### Light
Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Irony

This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.

"You tolerate these things well enough!" Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.

The statement, "For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!" means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.

"I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that." Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. "Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

#### Rhetorical questions

In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: "Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more."

He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: "Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?"

#### "Are they servants of Christ?"
This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: "If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses." Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md))
+2CO 11 intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### False teaching
The Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Light
Light is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Irony

This chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.

"You tolerate these things well enough!" Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.

The statement, "For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!" means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.

"I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that." Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. "Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Rhetorical questions

In refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: "Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more."

He also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: "Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?"

### "Are they servants of Christ?"
This is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: "If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses." Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](./30.md))
2CO 11 1 t7ks 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to affirm his apostleship. 2CO 11 1 r4q6 0 put up with me in some foolishness "allow me to act like a fool" 2CO 11 2 m6vl 0 jealous ... jealousy These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him. @@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 11 32 j7de πιάσαι με 1 to arrest me "so that they might catch and arrest me" 2CO 11 33 i8xa figs-activepassive ἐν σαργάνῃ ἐχαλάσθην 1 I was lowered in a basket This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 11 33 aw7d figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 from his hands Paul uses the governor's hands as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: "from the governor" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.

When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Paul's vision

Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

#### Third heaven
Many scholars believe the "third" heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses "heaven" to refer to the sky (the "first" heaven) and the universe (the "second" heaven).

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: "For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?" "Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?" and "Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

#### Sarcasm

Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, "Forgive me for this wrong!" He also uses regular irony when he says: "But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit." He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: "I will not boast, except about my weaknesses." Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: "For whenever I am weak, then I am strong." In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md))
+2CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul continues defending his authority in this chapter.

When Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Paul's vision

Paul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Third heaven
Many scholars believe the "third" heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses "heaven" to refer to the sky (the "first" heaven) and the universe (the "second" heaven).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: "For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?" "Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?" and "Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Sarcasm

Paul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, "Forgive me for this wrong!" He also uses regular irony when he says: "But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit." He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A "paradox" is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: "I will not boast, except about my weaknesses." Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: "For whenever I am weak, then I am strong." In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](./05.md))
2CO 12 1 iwn3 0 Connecting Statement: In defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer. 2CO 12 1 iur3 0 I will go on to "I will continue talking, but now about" 2CO 12 1 rb42 figs-hendiadys ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου 1 visions and revelations from the Lord Possible meanings are 1) Paul uses the words "visions" and "revelations" to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: "things that the Lord has allowed only me to see" or 2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: "secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 12 21 rh22 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 of the impurity The abstract noun impurity can be translated as "things that do not please God." Alternate translation: "of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 12 21 rn6u figs-abstractnouns 0 of the ... sexual immorality The abstract noun "immorality" can be translated as "immoral deeds." Alternate translation: "of doing sexually immoral deeds" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 12 21 yyr5 figs-abstractnouns 0 of the ... lustful indulgence The abstract noun "indulgence" can be translated using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: "of ... doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Preparation
Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
#### Power and weakness
Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words "power" and "weakness" in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.

#### "Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves."
Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+2CO 13 intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Preparation
Paul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Power and weakness
Paul repeatedly uses the contrasting words "power" and "weakness" in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.

### "Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves."
Scholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
2CO 13 1 y8fz 0 Connecting Statement: Paul establishes that Christ is speaking through him and that Paul is wanting to restore them, encourage them, and unify them. 2CO 13 1 slj1 figs-activepassive 0 Every accusation must be established by the evidence of two or three witnesses This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 13 2 fxl6 τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν 1 all the rest "all you other people" diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 8dd060f30..b0fcd593b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Galatians

1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other's burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).

### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?

Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.

### What is the Book of Galatians about?

Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Galatians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to the Church in Galatia." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What does it mean to "live like Jews" (2:14)?

To "live like Jews" means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called "Judaizers."

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How did Paul use the terms "law" and "grace" in the Book of Galatians?

These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called "the law of Christ." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, "when we seek for God to justify us in Christ" (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?

* "Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes" (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, "[so] that ye should not obey the truth." Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators' region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was "not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones." Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Heresy
God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

#### Paul's qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "You are turning so quickly to a different gospel"
The Book of Galatians is one of Paul's earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was "not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones." Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Heresy
God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

### Paul's qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "You are turning so quickly to a different gospel"
The Book of Galatians is one of Paul's earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
GAL 1 1 m4ss figs-you 0 General Information: Paul, an apostle, writes this letter to the churches in the area of Galatia. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of "you" and "your" in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 1 1 d1kd τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν 1 who raised him "who caused him to live again" GAL 1 2 d737 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women, since all believers in Christ are members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. Alternate translation: "brothers and sisters" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ GAL 1 20 h3cb figs-litotes ἃ δὲ γράφω ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐνώ GAL 1 21 m25a κλίματα τῆς Συρίας 1 regions of "part of the world called" GAL 1 22 y6l4 ἤμην δὲ ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ 1 I was still not personally known to the churches of Judea that are in Christ "None of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me" GAL 1 23 z8qt μόνον δὲ ἀκούοντες ἦσαν 1 They only heard it being said "but they only knew what they heard others saying about me" -GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Freedom and slavery

Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "I do not negate the grace of God"

Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words "I do not negate the grace of God" as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, "If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
+GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Freedom and slavery

Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "I do not negate the grace of God"

Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words "I do not negate the grace of God" as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, "If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up "traveled." Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς ... δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important "the most important leaders among the believers" @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ ... διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ ... διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness could be gained through the law "if people could become righteous by obeying the law" GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing "then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying" -GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Equality in Christ
All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh
This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. "Flesh" is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

#### "Those of faith are children of Abraham"
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul's other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ
All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh
This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. "Flesh" is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### "Those of faith are children of Abraham"
Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul's other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
GAL 3 1 p7uw 0 General Information: Paul is rebuking the Galatians by asking rhetorical questions. GAL 3 1 x4gd 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers in Galatia that God gave them God's Spirit when they believed the gospel by faith, not by their doing God's law. GAL 3 1 ryu7 figs-irony τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν 1 Who has put a spell on you? Paul is using irony and a rhetorical question to say that the Galatians are acting as though someone has put a spell on them. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on them. Alternate translation: "You behave as if someone has put a spell on you!" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ GAL 3 27 v6n1 ὅσοι γὰρ εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε GAL 3 27 di9v figs-metaphor Χριστὸν ... ἐνεδύσασθε 1 have clothed yourselves with Christ Possible meanings are 1) this is a metaphor meaning that they have been united to Christ. Alternate translation: "have become united with Christ" or "belong to Christ" or 2) this is a metaphor meaning that they have become like Christ. Alternate translation: "have become like Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 3 28 tyb8 οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ 1 There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female "God sees no difference between Jew and Greek, slave and free, male and female" GAL 3 29 qp4z figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι 1 heirs The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sonship
Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel's sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham's physical descendants inherited God's promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them "children of promise." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Abba, Father
"Abba" is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul "transliterates" its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sonship
Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel's sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham's physical descendants inherited God's promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them "children of promise." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father
"Abba" is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul "transliterates" its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) GAL 4 1 fr5u 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind the Galatian believers that Christ came to redeem those who were under the law, and that he made them no more slaves but sons. GAL 4 1 n5yb οὐδὲν διαφέρει 1 no different from "the same as" GAL 4 2 bd5a ἐπιτρόπους 1 guardians people with legal responsibility for children @@ -214,7 +214,7 @@ GAL 4 29 c9lf figs-metaphor κατὰ σάρκα 1 according to the flesh This r GAL 4 29 gt1e κατὰ ... Πνεῦμα, οὕτως 1 according to the Spirit "because of something the Spirit did" GAL 4 31 sy8u ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 4 31 y3c2 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας 1 but of the free woman The words "we are children" are understood from the previous phrase. This can be translated as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: "Rather, we are children of the free woman" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Fruit of the Spirit
The phrase "the fruit of the Spirit" is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Illustrations
Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace."
Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
+GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fruit of the Spirit
The phrase "the fruit of the Spirit" is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Illustrations
Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace."
Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]])
GAL 5 1 up16 0 Connecting Statement: Paul applies the allegory by reminding the believers to use their liberty in Christ because all the law is fulfilled in loving neighbors as ourselves. GAL 5 1 kuu9 figs-explicit τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free "It is so that we can be free that Christ has set us free." It is implied that Christ sets believers free from the old covenant. Here freedom from the old covenant is a metaphor for not being obligated to obey it. Alternate translation: "Christ has set us free from the old covenant so that we might be free" or "Christ has set us free so that we might live as free poeple" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 5 1 j679 figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Stand firm Standing firm here represents being determined not to change. How they are not to change can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: "Do not give in to the arguments of people who teach something else" or "Be determined to stay free" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ GAL 5 24 m3nm figs-personification τὴν σάρκα ... σὺν τοῖς πα GAL 5 25 h9hd εἰ ζῶμεν Πνεύματι 1 If we live by the Spirit "Since God's Spirit has caused us to be alive" GAL 5 25 sq7b figs-metaphor Πνεύματι ... στοιχῶμεν 1 walk by the Spirit "Walk" here is a metaphor for living every day. Alternate translation: "allow the Holy Spirit to guide us so we do things that please and honor God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 5 26 a9x9 γινώμεθα 1 Let us "We should" -GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul's letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

#### Brothers
Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them "brothers." This refers to Paul's Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person's ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is contrasted with "spirit." In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
+GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul's letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

### Brothers
Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them "brothers." This refers to Paul's Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person's ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is contrasted with "spirit." In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])
GAL 6 1 x8zg 0 Connecting Statement: Paul teaches believers how they should treat other believers and how God rewards. GAL 6 1 ss7l ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 6 1 vm8f ἐὰν καὶ ... ἄνθρωπος 1 if someone "if anyone among you" diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index 80774abb2..4bf7eac03 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in you, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make them strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
1. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God's love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Ephesians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to the Church in Ephesus" or "A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the "hidden truth" in the Book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as "hidden truth" or "hidden" occurs six times. By it Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to cause peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to unite Jews and Gentiles through Christ. Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural "you"

In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. The word "you" is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the "new self" or the "new man"?

When Paul spoke of the "new self" or the "new man," he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God's image (See: 4:24). The phrase "new man" is also used for God causing peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of "holy" to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of "holy" is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses "holy," "holy God," "holy ones," or "holy people." (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses "believer" or "believers."
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "set apart," "dedicated to," or "reserved for." (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Ephesians?


* "in Ephesus" (1:1). Some early manuscripts do not include this expression, but it is probably in the original letter. The ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* "because we are members of his body" (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, "because we are members of his body and of his bones." Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the Book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### "I pray"

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Predestination
Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])
+EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### "I pray"

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination
Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as "predestination." This is related to the biblical concept of "predestine." Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]])
EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers at the church at Ephesus. Except where noted, all instances of "you" and "your" refers to the Ephesian believers as well as all believers and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 1 1 ilf2 0 Paul, an apostle ... to God's holy people in Ephesus Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: "I, Paul, an apostle ... write this letter to you, God's holy people Ephesus" EPH 1 1 u73p figs-metaphor τοῖς ... οὖσιν ... πιστοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 who are faithful in Christ Jesus "In Christ Jesus" and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ EPH 1 22 jm9i figs-metonymy 0 all things under Christ's feet Here "feet" repres EPH 1 22 pm4t figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 1 head over all things Here "head" refers to the leader or the one who is in charge. Alternate translation: "ruler over all things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 1 23 ge2c figs-metaphor τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 1 his body Just as with a human body, the head (verse 22) rules all things pertaining to its body, so Christ is the head of the church body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 1 23 w2kh 0 the fullness of him who fills all in all "Christ fills the church with his life and power just as he gives life to all things" -EPH 2 intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter focuses on a Christian's life before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person's former way of living is distinct from a Christian's new identity "in Christ." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### One body
Paul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or "body." The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### "Dead in trespasses and sins"
Paul teaches that those who are not Christians are "dead" in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually "dead." Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Descriptions of worldly living
Paul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They "lived according to the ways of this world" and are "living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air," "fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature," and "carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind."

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "It is the gift of God"
Some scholars believe "it" here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, "it" here more likely refers to all of being saved by God's grace through faith.

#### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. The phrase "Gentiles in the flesh" indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. "Flesh" is also used in this verse to refer to the physical part of man. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
+EPH 2 intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter focuses on a Christian's life before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person's former way of living is distinct from a Christian's new identity "in Christ." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### One body
Paul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or "body." The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "Dead in trespasses and sins"
Paul teaches that those who are not Christians are "dead" in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually "dead." Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Descriptions of worldly living
Paul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They "lived according to the ways of this world" and are "living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air," "fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature," and "carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind."

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "It is the gift of God"
Some scholars believe "it" here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, "it" here more likely refers to all of being saved by God's grace through faith.

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. The phrase "Gentiles in the flesh" indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. "Flesh" is also used in this verse to refer to the physical part of man. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])
EPH 2 1 xf5s 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers of their past and the way they now are before God. EPH 2 1 dxx8 figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ὄντας νεκροὺς τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 you were dead in your trespasses and sins This shows how sinful people are unable to obey God in the same way a dead person is unable to respond physically. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 1 lp32 figs-doublet τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 your trespasses and sins The words "trespasses" and "sins" have similar meanings. Paul uses them together to emphasize the greatness of the people's sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ EPH 2 21 ljt5 figs-metaphor 0 In him ... in the Lord "In Christ ... in the Lord EPH 2 22 u55j figs-metaphor 0 in him "in Christ" This metaphor expresses the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 b4c8 figs-metaphor 0 you also are being built together as a dwelling place for God in the Spirit This describes how believers are being put together to become a place where God will permanently live through the power of the Holy Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 e52h figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε 1 you also are being built together This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "God is also building you together" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### "I pray"

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Mystery
Paul refers to the church as a "mystery." The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God.
+EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### "I pray"

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mystery
Paul refers to the church as a "mystery." The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God.
EPH 3 1 w896 0 Connecting Statement: To make clear the hidden truth about the church to believers, Paul refers back to the oneness of Jews and Gentiles and the temple of which believers are now a part. EPH 3 1 jb9u τούτου χάριν 1 Because of this "Because of God's grace to you" EPH 3 1 m9b6 0 the prisoner of Christ Jesus "the one whom Christ Jesus has put in prison" @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ EPH 3 20 jk5c figs-inclusive 0 General Information: The words "we" and "us" in EPH 3 20 m7gi 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes his prayer with a blessing. EPH 3 20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 Now to him who "Now to God, who" EPH 3 20 zxt3 0 to do far beyond all that we ask or think "to do much more than all that we ask or think" or "to do things that are much greater than all that we ask him for or think about" -EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### Unity
Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Old man and new man
The term "old man" probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The "new man" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
+EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual gifts
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Unity
Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Old man and new man
The term "old man" probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The "new man" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ.
EPH 4 1 sb64 0 Connecting Statement: Because of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other. EPH 4 1 uss5 0 as the prisoner for the Lord "as someone who is in prison because of his choice to serve the Lord" EPH 4 1 zxr1 figs-metaphor ἀξίως περιπατῆσαι τῆς κλήσεως 1 walk worthily of the calling Walking is a common way to express the idea of living one's life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ EPH 4 31 v576 figs-metaphor 0 Put away all bitterness, rage, anger "Put away" h EPH 4 31 t1gj θυμὸς 1 rage intense anger EPH 4 32 ygw4 0 Be kind "Instead, be kind" EPH 4 32 w7tk εὔσπλαγχνοι 1 tenderhearted being gentle and compassionate towards others -EPH 5 intro tdd2 0 # Ephesians 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 14.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Inheritance of the kingdom of Christ
This is difficult to understand. Some scholars believe those who continue to practice these things will not inherit eternal life. But God can forgive all the sins listed in this verse. So immoral, impure, or greedy people can still receive eternal life if they repent and believe in Jesus. A more natural reading is "No person who is sexually immoral or indecent, or who is greedy (for this is the same as worshiping idols) will be among God's people over whom Christ rules as king." (UST) (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Wives, submit to your husbands
Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
+EPH 5 intro tdd2 0 # Ephesians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 14.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Inheritance of the kingdom of Christ
This is difficult to understand. Some scholars believe those who continue to practice these things will not inherit eternal life. But God can forgive all the sins listed in this verse. So immoral, impure, or greedy people can still receive eternal life if they repent and believe in Jesus. A more natural reading is "No person who is sexually immoral or indecent, or who is greedy (for this is the same as worshiping idols) will be among God's people over whom Christ rules as king." (UST) (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Wives, submit to your husbands
Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.
EPH 5 1 wus5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to tell the believers how they should and should not live as God's children. EPH 5 1 jx2q γίνεσθε οὖν μιμηταὶ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Therefore be imitators of God "Therefore you should do what God does." Therefore refers back to [Ephesians 4:32](../04/32.md) which tells why believers should imitate God, because Christ forgave believers. EPH 5 1 zen5 figs-simile ὡς τέκνα ἀγαπητά 1 as dearly loved children God desires us to imitate or follow him since we are his children. Alternate translation: "as dearly loved children imitate their fathers" or "because you are his children and he loves you dearly" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ EPH 5 29 h5aa ἀλλὰ ἐκτρέφει 1 but nourishes "but feeds" EPH 5 30 h44f figs-metaphor μέλη ἐσμὲν τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ 1 we are members of his body Here Paul speaks of the close union of believers with Christ as if they were part of his own body, for which he would naturally care. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 5 31 yp23 0 General Information: The quotation is from the writings of Moses in the Old Testament. EPH 5 31 yp23 0 General Information: The words "his" and "himself" refer to a male believer who marries. -EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Slavery
Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Armor of God
This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery
Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Armor of God
This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
EPH 6 1 wq46 figs-you 0 General Information: The first word "your" is plural. Then Paul quotes Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so "your" and "you" are singular. You may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 6 1 jf17 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to each other. He gives instructions to children, fathers, workers, and masters. EPH 6 1 ev8m τὰ τέκνα, ὑπακούετε τοῖς γονεῦσιν ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Children, obey your parents in the Lord Paul reminds children to obey their physical parents. diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index 6be748e26..21a716c8c 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of the Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul's report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)

### Who wrote the Book Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Philippians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to the Church in Philippi," or "A Letter to the Christians in Philippi." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural "you"

In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. The word "you" is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the "enemies of the cross of Christ" (3:18) in this letter?

The "enemies of the cross of Christ" were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God's commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words "joy" and "rejoice" frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### What does Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?

* Some versions have "Amen" at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If "Amen" is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The day of Christ
This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: "to die is gain." In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
+PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The day of Christ
This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: "to die is gain." In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md))
PHP 1 1 c255 figs-you 0 General Information: Paul and Timothy wrote this letter to the church at Philippi. Because Paul writes later in the letter saying "I," it is generally assumed that he is the author and that Timothy, who is with him, writes as Paul speaks. All instances of "you" and "your" in the letter refer to the believers in the Philippian church and are plural. The word "our" probably refers to all believers in Christ, including Paul, Timothy, and the Philippian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) PHP 1 1 kze2 Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος … καὶ διακόνοις 0 Paul and Timothy ... and deacons If your language has a particular way of introducing the authors of a letter, use it here. PHP 1 1 kx8h Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος, δοῦλοι Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul and Timothy, servants of Christ Jesus "Timothy, who are servants of Christ Jesus" @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ PHP 1 28 i9yt figs-you μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 0 Do not b PHP 1 28 l495 ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 0 This is a sign to them of their destruction, but of your salvation—and this from God "Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you" PHP 1 28 nb4b καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 and this from God "and this is from God." Possible meanings are the word "this" refers to 1) the believers' courage or 2) the sign or 3) destruction and salvation. PHP 1 30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 having the same conflict which you saw in me, and now you hear in me "suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you hear I am still suffering" -PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Practical instructions
In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "If there is any"
This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as "Since there is."
+PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions
In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "If there is any"
This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as "Since there is."
PHP 2 1 xye5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ's example. PHP 2 1 b1q7 εἴ τις ... παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If there is any encouragement in Christ "If Christ has encouraged you" or "If you are encouraged because of Christ" PHP 2 1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 if there is any comfort provided by love The phrase "by love" probably refers to Christ's love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: "if his love has given you any comfort" or "if his love for you has comforted you in any way" @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ PHP 2 29 y95x Προσδέχεσθε … αὐτὸν 0 Welcome Epaphroditus "G PHP 2 29 qx14 ἐν Κυρίῳ μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς 1 in the Lord with all joy "as a fellow believer in the Lord with all joy" or "with the great joy we have because the Lord Jesus loves us" PHP 2 30 ns1y figs-metaphor μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν 1 he came near death Paul here speaks of death as if it were a place that one could go to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 2 30 g98z figs-metaphor ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 0 fill up what you could not do in service to me Paul speaks of his needs as if they were a container that Epaphroditus filled with good things for Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Dogs
The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term "dogs" in this way.

#### Resurrected Bodies
We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Prize
Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it.
+PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs
The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term "dogs" in this way.

### Resurrected Bodies
We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize
Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it.
PHP 3 1 e79h 0 Connecting Statement: In order to warn his fellow believers about Jews who would try to get them to follow the old laws, Paul gives his own testimony about when he persecuted believers. PHP 3 1 s3bx τὸ λοιπόν, ἀδελφοί μου 1 Finally, my brothers "Now moving along, my brothers" or "Concerning other matters, my brothers" PHP 3 1 zu9l ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ PHP 3 20 n2lh ἡμῶν ... τὸ πολίτευμα ἐν οὐρανοῖς PHP 3 21 eye2 ὃς μετασχηματίσει τὸ σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν 1 He will transform our lowly bodies "He will change our weak, earthly bodies" PHP 3 21 b2bc σύμμορφον τῷ σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 into bodies formed like his glorious body "into bodies like his glorious body" PHP 3 21 qz6p figs-activepassive τῷ σώματι … κατὰ τὴν ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι αὐτὸν, καὶ ὑποτάξαι αὑτῷ τὰ πάντα 0 body, formed by the might of his power to subject all things to himself This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "body. He will change our bodies with the same power he uses to control all things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 04 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "My joy and my crown"
Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Euodia and Syntyche
Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "My joy and my crown"
Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Euodia and Syntyche
Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
PHP 4 1 zk6q figs-you 0 General Information: When Paul says, "my true companion," the word "you" is singular. Paul does not say the name of the person. He calls him that to show he worked with Paul to spread the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHP 4 1 xmc4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues with some specific instructions to the believers in Philippi on unity and then gives instructions to help them live for the Lord. PHP 4 1 fe2y ὥστε, ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοὶ καὶ ἐπιπόθητοι 0 Therefore, my beloved brothers whom I long for "My fellow believers, I love you and I greatly desire to see you" diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 8b1948ee5..f5a0d5ce4 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Colossians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul's personal greeting (4:18)

### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?

Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Colossians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Colossians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to the Church in Colossae," or "A Letter to the Christians in Colossae." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?

In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.

### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?

In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as "above." He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being "below." The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in Colossians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses "believers" or "those who believe in him." (See: 1:2, 12, 26)

### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?

Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus "is the firstborn of all creation." This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.

### What does Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father" (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: "Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ."
* "Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf" (1:7). Some older versions read "for you": "Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you."
* "the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light" (1:12). Some older versions read, "the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light."
* "In his Son we have redemption" (1:14). Some older versions read, "In his Son we have redemption through his blood."
* "and forgave us all of our trespasses" (2:13). Some older versions read: "and forgave you all of your trespasses."
* "When Christ appears, who is your life" (3:4). Some older versions read, "When Christ appears, who is our life."
* "It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience" (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, "It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming."
* "I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us" (4:8). Some older versions read, "I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Secret truth

Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Images for Christian living
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of "walking" and "bearing fruit." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: "Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you." People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md))
+COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Images for Christian living
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of "walking" and "bearing fruit." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: "Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you." People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md))
COL 1 1 h5gl figs-inclusive 0 General Information: Though this letter is from Paul and Timothy to the Colossian believers, later in the letter Paul makes it clear that he is the writer. Most likely Timothy was with him and wrote the words down as Paul spoke. Throughout this letter the words "we," "our," and "ours" include the Colossians unless noted otherwise. The words "you," "your," and "yours" refer to the Colossian believers and so are plural unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) COL 1 1 fny3 ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 an apostle of Christ Jesus through the will of God "whom God chose to be an apostle of Christ Jesus" COL 1 3 q1su figs-exclusive 0 We give ... our Lord ... we always These words do not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ COL 1 28 va1x figs-exclusive 0 we proclaim ... We admonish ... we teach ... we COL 1 28 na8w νουθετοῦντες πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 We admonish every person "We warn everyone" COL 1 28 lyz1 figs-explicit ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 so that we may present every person You may need to make explicit to whom they will present every person. Alternate translation: "so that we may present to God every person" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 28 uk2i figs-metaphor τέλειον 1 complete Being complete is a metaphor for being spiritually mature. Alternate translation: "spiritually mature" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Circumcision and baptism
In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses "flesh" in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

#### Implicit information
Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Circumcision and baptism
In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses "flesh" in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

### Implicit information
Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
COL 2 1 tt6v 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to encourage the believers in Colossae and Laodicea to understand that Christ is God and that he lives in believers, so they should live in the same way they received him. COL 2 1 dqg5 ἡλίκον ἀγῶνα ἔχω ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 how great a struggle I have had for you Paul has exerted much effort in developing their purity and understanding of the gospel. COL 2 1 fn4z τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ 1 those at Laodicea This was a city very close to Colossae where there was also a church for which Paul was praying. @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ COL 2 21 n3ne figs-rquestion 0 "Do ... touch"? The rhetorical question that beg COL 2 21 b392 μὴ ἅψῃ! μηδὲ γεύσῃ! μηδὲ θίγῃς 1 "Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch" Paul is quoting what other people have been telling the Colossians. "why do you believe them when they say, 'Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch'?" or "you should not obey them when they say, 'Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch'" COL 2 23 y2dc 0 These rules have the wisdom of self-made religion and humility and severity of the body "These rules seem wise to unbelieving people because they allow those who follow them to appear humble because they hurt their own bodies" COL 2 23 e7p5 οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι πρὸς πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός 1 have no value against the indulgence of the flesh "do not help you stop following your human desires" -COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Old and new self
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term "old man" probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The "new man" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

#### "The things above"

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located "above." Paul says to "seek the things above" and to "think about the things above." He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things.
+COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old and new self
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term "old man" probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The "new man" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### "The things above"

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located "above." Paul says to "seek the things above" and to "think about the things above." He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things.
COL 3 1 ya97 0 Connecting Statement: Paul warns the believers that because they are one with Christ, they ought not do certain things. COL 3 1 r5yh figs-idiom εἰ οὖν 1 If then This is an idiom that means "because." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 1 t1jv figs-pastforfuture τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 God has raised you with Christ Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Possible meanings are 1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given the believers in Colossae new spiritual life. Alternate translation: "God has given you new life because you belong to Christ" or 2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Colossae can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: "you can be sure that God will give you life as he has caused Christ to come alive again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ COL 3 24 p3pw figs-metaphor κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Receiving what COL 3 25 u5lx 0 anyone who does unrighteousness will receive the penalty The phrase "receive the penalty" means to be punished. Alternate translation: "anyone who does unrighteousness will be punished" or "God will punish anyone who does what is unrighteous" COL 3 25 ak8j ἀδικῶν 1 who does unrighteousness who actively does wrong of any kind COL 3 25 c9fx figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία 1 there is no favoritism The abstract noun "favoritism" can be expressed with the verb "favor." To favor some people is to judge them by different standards so the result is better for them than for others who do the same actions. Alternate translation: "God does not favor anyone" or "God judges everyone by the same standard" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "In my own hand"
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Secret truth

Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
+COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "In my own hand"
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
COL 4 1 qhd2 0 Connecting Statement: After speaking to masters, Paul ends his special instructions to the different kinds of believers in the church at Colossae. COL 4 1 ae3y figs-doublet τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὴν ἰσότητα 1 right and fair These words mean almost the same thing and are used to emphasize the things that are morally correct. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 4 1 t9wy καὶ ... ὑμεῖς ἔχετε Κύριον ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 you also have a master in heaven God wants the relationship between an earthly master and his slave to be loving the way God, the heavenly master, loves his earthly servants, including the earthly slaves' masters. diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index f98814c23..08e92df82 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians

1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul's ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul's concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ's return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul's letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.

### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "1 Thessalonians" or "First Thessalonians." They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica," or "The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the "second coming" of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus' eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ's return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like "in Christ" and "in the Lord."?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "May grace and peace be to you" (1:1). Some older versions read: "Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ."
* "Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children." (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, "Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children."
* "Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God" (3:2). Some other versions read: "Timothy, our brother and servant of God."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Hardship
Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hardship
Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1TH 1 1 dp37 0 General Information: Paul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica. 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 0 Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy to the church The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 luw5 figs-metonymy χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 0 May grace and peace be to you The terms "grace" and "peace" are metonyms for the person who acts toward people in a kindly and peaceful manner. Alternate translation: "May God be kind to you and give you peace" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 pmi8 ὃν ἤγειρεν 1 whom he raised "whom God caused to live again" 1TH 1 10 wba8 ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead "so that he was no longer dead." This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-inclusive τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 0 who frees us Here Paul includes the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) -1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Christian witness
Paul values his "Christian witness" as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
+1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian witness
Paul values his "Christian witness" as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
1TH 2 1 pt75 0 Connecting Statement: Paul defines the believers' service and reward. 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 you yourselves The words "you" and "yourselves" refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 1 tdl3 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-metonymy ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ... ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 0 our hope ... Is it not you By "hope" Paul means the assurance he has that God will reward him for his work. The Thessalonian Christians are the reason for his hope. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 ty78 figs-metonymy ἢ χαρὰ 1 or joy The Thessalonians are the reason for his joy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of pride Here "crown" refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression "crown of pride" means a reward for victory, or having done well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Standing
In this chapter, Paul uses "stand firm" to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses "be shaken" as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
+1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Standing
In this chapter, Paul uses "stand firm" to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses "be shaken" as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])
1TH 3 1 nal1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells the believers he has sent Timothy to strengthen their faith. 1TH 3 1 fqe3 μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 we could no longer bear it "we could no longer endure worrying about you" 1TH 3 1 t3vt ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 good to be left behind at Athens alone "good for Silvanus and me to stay behind in Athens" @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metonymy τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους 0 strengthen your hearts, so that they will be Here "heart" is a metonym for one's beliefs and convictions. Alternate translation: "strenghten you, so that you will be" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 3 13 xsd3 ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus "when Jesus comes back to earth" 1TH 3 13 jlc5 μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 with all his saints "with all those who belong to him" -1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sexual immorality
Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

#### Dying before the return of Christ
In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

#### "Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air"
This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ's final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
+1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sexual immorality
Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

### Dying before the return of Christ
In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

### "Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air"
This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ's final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
1TH 4 1 wk39 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here "brothers" means fellow Christians. 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we encourage and exhort you Paul uses "encourage" and "exhort" to emphasize how strongly they encourage the believers. Alternate translation: "we strongly encourage you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 4 1 iij6 figs-activepassive παρελάβετε παρ’ ἡμῶν 1 you received instructions from us This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "we taught you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-inclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Here "we" refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1TH 4 17 wvi8 σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 with them The word "them" refers to the dead believers who were made alive again. 1TH 4 17 se1y ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air "meet the Lord Jesus in the sky" -1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile "like a thief in the night" means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

#### Quench the Spirit
This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit's guidance and work.
+1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile "like a thief in the night" means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Quench the Spirit
This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit's guidance and work.
1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-exclusive 0 General Information: In this chapter the words "we" and "us" refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Also, the word "you" is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1TH 5 1 z1s6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues talking about the day Jesus will come back. 1TH 5 1 h84m τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 the times and seasons This refers to the events preceding the Lord Jesus' return. diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index 815fd33c3..6756fd21b 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers' misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ's return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul's confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to "stand firm" (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ's return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "2 Thessalonians" or "Second Thessalonians." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica," or "The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the "second coming" of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus' eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a "man of lawlessness" will come before Christ's return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "and the man of lawlessness is revealed" (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, "and the man of sin is revealed."
* "For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation" (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, "For God chose you from the first for salvation."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: "We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God's righteous judgment." People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God's righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md)) +2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: "We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God's righteous judgment." People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God's righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md)) 2TH 1 1 b6vf figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica. The words "we" and "us" refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Also, the word "you" is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2TH 1 1 hm3e Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus This is the Latin form of "Silas." He is the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul's fellow traveler. 2TH 1 2 g6rb χάρις ὑμῖν 1 Grace to you Paul commonly uses this greeting in his letters. @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 that the name of our Lord Jesus may be glorified by you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that you may glorify the name of our Lord Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 0 you will be glorified by him This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Jesus will glorify you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 z8k9 κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 because of the grace of our God "because of God's grace" -2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Being gathered together to be with him"

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ's final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### Man of lawlessness
This is the same as "son of destruction" and "lawless one" in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

#### Sits in the temple of God
Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Being gathered together to be with him"

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ's final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness
This is the same as "son of destruction" and "lawless one" in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God
Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TH 2 1 r36t 0 General Information: Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back. 2TH 2 1 q1uq δὲ 1 Now The word "Now" marks a change of topic in Paul's instructions. 2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here "brothers" means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: "brothers and sisters" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ... ὁ Κύριος ... Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 Lord Jesus Christ himself Here "himself" gives additional emphasis to the phrase "Lord Jesus Christ." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι ἐν 1 comfort and establish your hearts in Here "hearts" represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: "comfort you and strengthen you for" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 17 yw5f παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word "every good thing you do and say" -2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Idle and lazy persons
In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
+2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons
In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
2TH 3 1 k33i 0 General Information: Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions. 2TH 3 1 jy75 τὸ λοιπὸν 0 Now Paul uses the word "now" to mark a change in topic. 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here "brothers" means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: "brothers and sisters" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 5c74493d2..5c2e067da 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

1. Greetings (1:1,2)
1. Paul and Timothy
- Warning about false teachers (1:3-11)
- Paul thankful for what Christ has done in his ministry (1:12-17)
- He calls Timothy to fight in this spiritual battle (1:18-20)
1. Prayer for all (2:1-8)
1. Roles and responsibilities in the church (2:9-6:2)
1. Warnings
- Second warning about false teachers (6:3-5)
- Money (6:6-10)
1. Description of a man of God (6:11-16)
1. Note to the wealthy people (6:17-19)
1. Closing words to Timothy (6:20,21)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the first letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote it near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "1 Timothy" or "First Timothy." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's First Letter to Timothy." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

#### Singular and plural "you"
In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. Also, the word "you" is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 6:21. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 1 Timothy?

For the following verse, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "godliness is a way to get more money." Some older versions of the Bible read this way, "godliness is a way to get more money: withdraw from such things." (6:5)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Spiritual children
In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a "son" and his "child." Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his "son in the faith." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Genealogies

Genealogies are lists that record a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could normally become king. They also showed from what tribe and family they came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Play on words
The phrase "the law is good if one uses it lawfully" is a play on words. The words "law" and "lawfully" sound similar in the original language.
+1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children
In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a "son" and his "child." Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his "son in the faith." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Genealogies

Genealogies are lists that record a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could normally become king. They also showed from what tribe and family they came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Play on words
The phrase "the law is good if one uses it lawfully" is a play on words. The words "law" and "lawfully" sound similar in the original language.
1TI 1 1 u1g9 figs-inclusive 0 General Information: In this book, unless otherwise noted, the word "our" refers to Paul and Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), as well as to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος 1 Paul, an apostle "I, Paul, wrote this letter. I am an apostle." Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Immediately after introducing the writer, you may want to indicate to whom the letter was written, as in the UST. 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 according to the commandment of "by the command of" or "by the authority of" @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 20 pv7f translate-names Ὑμέναιος ... Ἀλέξανδρος 0 Hymenaeus ... Alexander These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1TI 1 20 ty7n figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 whom I gave over to Satan Paul speaks as if he physically handed these men to Satan. This probably means that Paul rejected them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan can have power over them and harm them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 20 s76c figs-activepassive παιδευθῶσι 1 they may be taught This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that God may teach them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Peace
Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

#### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings"
These terms overlap each other in what they mean. It is not necessary to view them as distinct categories.
+1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace
Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings"
These terms overlap each other in what they mean. It is not necessary to view them as distinct categories.
1TI 2 1 z2xx 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages Timothy to pray for all people. 1TI 2 1 yk2z πρῶτον πάντων 1 first of all "most important" or "before anything else" 1TI 2 1 ql7a figs-activepassive παρακαλῶ ... ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας 1 I urge that requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings be made This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgiving to God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 2 15 sl57 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 in faith and love and sanctification The abstract nouns here can be translated with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: "in trusting Jesus and loving others and living a holy life" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 2 15 dcf3 figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 with soundness of mind Possible meanings for this idiom are 1) "with good judgment," 2) "with modesty," or 3) "with self-control." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 2 15 zr4b figs-abstractnouns σωφροσύνης 1 soundness of mind If the idiom is retained in translation, the abstract noun "soundness" can be translated with an adjective. Alternate translation: "a sound mind" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

[1 Timothy 3:16](./16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to list important doctrines that believers all shared.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Overseers and deacons
The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word "overseer" reflects the meaning of the original language in verses 1-2. Paul writes about "deacons" in verses 8 and 12 as another kind of church leader.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Character qualities
This chapter lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an overseer or deacon in the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

[1 Timothy 3:16](./16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to list important doctrines that believers all shared.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Overseers and deacons
The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word "overseer" reflects the meaning of the original language in verses 1-2. Paul writes about "deacons" in verses 8 and 12 as another kind of church leader.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character qualities
This chapter lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an overseer or deacon in the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1TI 3 1 rwi8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives some special instructions on how the overseers of the church should act and be. 1TI 3 1 f133 καλοῦ ἔργου 1 a good work "an honorable task" 1TI 3 2 dff6 μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἄνδρα 1 husband of one wife An overseer must have only one wife. It is unclear if this excludes men who have been previously widowed or divorced, or never married. @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 3 16 h9mb figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 was believed on in the world This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people in many parts of the world believed in him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 jz11 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 was taken up in glory This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God the Father took him up to heaven in glory" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 mr3a ἐν δόξῃ 1 in glory This means he received power from God the Father and he is worthy of honor. -1TI 4 intro b39h 0 # 1 Timothy 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

[1 Timothy 4:1](../04/01.md) is a prophecy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Later times
This is another way of referring to the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
+1TI 4 intro b39h 0 # 1 Timothy 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

[1 Timothy 4:1](../04/01.md) is a prophecy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Later times
This is another way of referring to the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
1TI 4 1 gyd8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells Timothy what the Spirit says will happen and encourages him in what he should teach. 1TI 4 1 jzr9 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Here Paul starts to tell a new part of the teaching. 1TI 4 1 b739 ἐν ὑστέροις καιροῖς 1 in later times Possible meanings are 1) this refers to a time after Paul dies or 2) this is at a latter time in Paul's own life. @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Give careful attention to yourself and to the teaching "Conduct yourself carefully and give attention to the teaching" or "Control your own behavior and give attention to the teaching" 1TI 4 16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Continue in these things "Continue to do these things" 1TI 4 16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 you will save yourself and those who listen to you Possible meanings are 1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God's judgment or 2) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. -1TI 5 intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Honor and respect
Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.

#### Widows
In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows, because they could not provide for themselves.
+1TI 5 intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Honor and respect
Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.

### Widows
In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows, because they could not provide for themselves.
1TI 5 1 wt5y figs-you 0 General Information: Paul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of "you" or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1TI 5 1 h7d1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to tell Timothy how to treat the men, women, widows, and younger women in the church. 1TI 5 1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Do not rebuke an older man "Do not speak harshly to an older man" @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 25 pd8v τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ πρόδηλα 0 some good works are openly known "some good works are obvious" 1TI 5 25 qlu5 τὰ ἔργα τὰ καλὰ 1 good works The works are considered "good" because they fit with God's character, purposes, and will. 1TI 5 25 bl51 figs-metaphor καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 0 but even the others cannot be hidden Paul speaks of sins as if they were objects that someone could hide. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "but people will later find out about even the good deeds that are not obvious" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TI 6 intro rks4 0 # 1 Timothy 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving masters. Paul teaches all believers to be godly and content in every situation.
+1TI 6 intro rks4 0 # 1 Timothy 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving masters. Paul teaches all believers to be godly and content in every situation.
1TI 6 1 zg9b 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives some specific instructions to slaves and masters and then continues with instructions on living in a godly way. 1TI 6 1 nm4n figs-metaphor ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι 1 Let all who are under the yoke as slaves Paul speaks of people working as slaves as if they are oxen carrying a yoke. Alternate translation: "Let all who are working as slaves" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 1 ep1l figs-explicit ὅσοι εἰσὶν 1 Let all who are It is implied that Paul is speaking about believers. Alternate translation: "Let all who are believers" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 3bdfeda43..9a685e8f0 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
1. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
1. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
1. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-24).

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matter. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "2 Timothy" or "Second Timothy." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Second Letter to Timothy" or "The Second Letter to Timothy." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he often spoke of himself as a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers answer to their leaders. In the same way, Christians answer to Jesus. As "soldiers" of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why it is also referred to as God's word. This implies several things about the Bible. First, the Bible is free from error and can be trusted. Second, we can rely on God to protect the scripture from those who want to distort it or destroy it. Third, God's word should be translated into all the world's languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural "you"

In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. Here the word "you" is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression "in Christ," "in the Lord," etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher" (1:11). Some older versions read, "Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles."
* "Warn them before God" (2:14). Some older versions read, "Warn them before the Lord."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy "beloved child." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Persecution
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy "beloved child." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution
Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 1 dcr3 figs-inclusive 0 General Information: In this book, unless otherwise noted, the word "our" refers to Paul (the writer of this letter) and Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), as well as to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Also, immediately after introducing the author, you may need to tell to whom the letter is written, as in the UST. 2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God "because of God's will" or "because God wanted it to be so." Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle and not because a human being chose him. @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 18 p3di δῴη( αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 0 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from him "May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord" or "May the Lord show him mercy" 2TI 1 18 x2dk figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 0 to find mercy from him Paul speaks of mercy as if it were an object that could be found. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-metonymy ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 0 on that day This refers to the day when God will judge all people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set words farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with verses 11-13. Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn in these verses.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### We will reign with him
Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful)

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Analogies
In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
+2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set words farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with verses 11-13. Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn in these verses.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him
Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies
In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
2TI 2 1 t13s 0 Connecting Statement: Paul pictures Timothy's Christian life as a soldier's life, as a farmer's life, and as an athlete's life. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here "child" is a term of great love and approval. It is also likely that Timothy was converted to Christ by Paul, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: "who is like my child" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-metaphor ἐνδυναμοῦ ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 be strengthened in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul speaks about the motivation and determination that God's grace allows believers to have. Alternate translation: "let God use the grace he gave you through your relationship to Christ Jesus to make you strong" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 26 ef3q figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 0 They may become sober again Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming sober again. Alternate translation: "They may think correctly again" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 0 leave the devil's trap Paul speaks of the devil's ability to convince Christians to sin as if it were a trap. Alternate translation: "stop doing what the devil wants" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 0 after they have been captured by him for his will Convincing Christians to sin is spoken of as if the devil had physically captured them and made them his slaves. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "after he has deceived them into obeying his will" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The "last days" could mean in the future just before Jesus returns. If so, Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. The "last days" could also mean the Christian age, including Paul's time. If so, what Paul teaches about being persecuted applies to all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
+2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The "last days" could mean in the future just before Jesus returns. If so, Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. The "last days" could also mean the Christian age, including Paul's time. If so, what Paul teaches about being persecuted applies to all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
2TI 3 1 j97t 0 Connecting Statement: Paul lets Timothy know that in the future people will stop believing the truth, but he should continuing trusting God's word even when he is persecuted. 2TI 3 1 g65r ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 0 In the last days Possible meanings are 1) this is a time later than Paul's time. Alternate translation: "in the future just before Jesus returns" or 2) this refers to the Christian age, including Paul's time. Alternate translation: "during this period of time before the end" 2TI 3 1 n7gs καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 difficult times These will be days, months, or even years when Christians will endure suffering and danger. @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 16 y1hf πρὸς παιδείαν τὴν ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 for training in righteousness "for training people to be righteous" 2TI 3 17 nb12 figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man of God This means any believer in God whether male or female. Alternate translation: "all believers" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 3 17 uu7i ἄρτιος ᾖ ... ἐξηρτισμένος 1 may be competent, equipped "may be completely prepared" -2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

#### "I give this solemn command"
Paul begins to give personal instructions to Timothy.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Crown
Scripture uses different kinds of crowns as images for different things. It appears Christ will award the crown in this chapter to believers as a reward for living rightly.
+2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

### "I give this solemn command"
Paul begins to give personal instructions to Timothy.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Crown
Scripture uses different kinds of crowns as images for different things. It appears Christ will award the crown in this chapter to believers as a reward for living rightly.
2TI 4 1 t68n 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind Timothy to be faithful and that he, Paul, is ready to die. 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit διαμαρτύρομαι ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 0 this solemn command before God and Christ Jesus "this solemn command in the presence of God and Christ Jesus." It is implied that God and Jesus will be Paul's witnesses. Alternate translation: "this solemn command having as my witnesses God and Christ Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 0 solemn command "serious command" diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 5d7f2addf..c9592d41b 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Titus

1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders (1:1-16)
1. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives (2:1-3:11)
1. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers (3:12-15)

### Who wrote the Book of Titus?

Paul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Titus about?

Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. And he encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Titus." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "Paul's Letter to Titus" or "A Letter to Titus." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### In what roles can people serve within the church?

There are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

#### Singular and plural "you"
In this book, the word "I" refers to Paul. Also, the word "you" is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What is the meaning of "God our Savior?"

This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him. And by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is "our great God and Savior Jesus Christ."
-TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Should, may, must
The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
+TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must
The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way.
TIT 1 1 rtc9 κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith of to strengthen the faith of TIT 1 1 fyf8 τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν 1 that agrees with godliness "that is suitable for honoring God" TIT 1 2 r2gj πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before all the ages of time "before time began" @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ TIT 1 15 nx42 τοῖς καθαροῖς 1 To those who are pure "To those who TIT 1 15 n3wk figs-metaphor τοῖς μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπίστοις, οὐδὲν καθαρόν 1 to those who are corrupt and unbelieving, nothing is pure Paul speaks of sinners as if they were physically dirty. Alternate translation: "if people are morally defiled and do not believe, they cannot do anything pure" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 1 16 i3l2 τοῖς ... ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται 1 they deny him by their actions "how they live proves that they do not know him" TIT 1 16 ja47 βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες 1 They are detestable "They are disgusting" -TIT 2 intro h3il 0 # Titus 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Gender roles

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

#### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
+TIT 2 intro h3il 0 # Titus 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gender roles

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation.
TIT 2 1 lfu1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God's word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers. TIT 2 1 tpi2 figs-explicit σὺ δὲ λάλει ἃ πρέπει 1 But you, speak what fits Paul implies what is in contrast. Alternate translation: "But you, Titus, in contrast with the false teachers, be sure to say those things that fit" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) TIT 2 1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 with faithful instruction "with sound doctrine" or "with correct teachings" @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ TIT 2 14 ii18 ζηλωτὴν 1 are eager "have a strong desire" TIT 2 15 b94z figs-explicit ἔλεγχε μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς 1 give correction with all authority This statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "Correct with all authority those people who do not do these things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) TIT 2 15 h15y μηδείς ... περιφρονείτω 1 Let no one "Do not allow anyone to" TIT 2 15 jbu1 figs-explicit σου περιφρονείτω 1 disregard you This statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "refuse to listen to your words" or "refuse to respect you" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -TIT 3 intro zh6x 0 # Titus 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.

Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Genealogies

Genealogies are lists that record a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could normally become king. They also showed from what tribe and family they came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron.
+TIT 3 intro zh6x 0 # Titus 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.

Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogies

Genealogies are lists that record a person's ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could normally become king. They also showed from what tribe and family they came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron.
TIT 3 1 y9tr 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete. TIT 3 1 j2sa ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς ... ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 Remind them to submit "Tell our people again what they already know, to submit" or "Keep reminding them to submit" TIT 3 1 w3fy ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them "do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them" diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index 9c63a8327..78c54e3f6 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

1. Jesus is superior to God's prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus' ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus' sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "Hebrews." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "The Letter to the Hebrews" or "A Letter to the Jewish Christians." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?

It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.

### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God's covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal's death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in Hebrews in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses "holy," "holy God," "holy ones," or "holy people."
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses "believer" or "believers." (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "sanctify," "set apart," "dedicated to," or "reserved for." (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "you crowned him with glory and honor" (2:7). Some older versions read, "you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands."
* "those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed" (4:2). Some older versions read, "those who heard it without joining faith to it."
* "Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come" (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, "Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come."
* "on those who were prisoners" (10:34). Some older versions read, "of me in my chains."
* "They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword" (11:37). Some older versions read, "They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword."
* "If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned" (12:20). Some older versions read, "If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

#### "Our ancestors"

The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called "Hebrews."

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God's Son is more important than any of the angels.

#### Poetry

Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them.
+HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

### "Our ancestors"

The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called "Hebrews."

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God's Son is more important than any of the angels.

### Poetry

Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them.
HEB 1 1 c5f3 0 General Information: Although this letter does not mention the recipients to whom it was sent, the author wrote particularly to Hebrews (Jews), who would have understood the many Old Testament references. HEB 1 1 c5f3 0 General Information: This prologue lays the background for the whole book: the unsurpassing greatness of the Son — the Son is greater than all. The book begins with emphasizing that the Son is better than the prophets and the angels. HEB 1 2 scr8 ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων 1 in these last days "in these final days." This phrase refers to the time when Jesus began his ministry, extending until God establishes his complete rule in his creation. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ HEB 1 13 s6k7 translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at HEB 1 13 ulp5 figs-metaphor ἕως θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν τῶν ποδῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet Christ's enemies are spoken of as if they will become an object on which a king rests his feet. This image represents defeat and dishonor for his enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 14 fk5v figs-rquestion 0 Are not all angels spirits ... inherit salvation? The author uses this question to remind the readers that angels are not as powerful as Christ, but they have a different role. Alternate translation: "All angels are spirits who ... inherit salvation." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 1 14 v541 figs-metaphor διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν 1 for those who will inherit salvation Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: "for those whom God will save" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Brothers

The author probably uses the term "brothers" to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
+HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term "brothers" to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.
HEB 2 1 x7px 0 Connecting Statement: This is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives. HEB 2 1 c72f figs-inclusive 0 we must Here "we" refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) HEB 2 1 ayd1 figs-metaphor 0 so that we do not drift away from it Possible meanings for this metaphor are 1) people who stop believing in God's word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: "so that we do not stop believing it" or 2) people who stop obeying God's words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: "so that we do not stop obeying it" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ HEB 2 17 v3pw τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ὁμοιωθῆναι 1 like his br HEB 2 17 u6ch ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς λαοῦ' ἁμαρτίας λαοῦ 1 he would bring about the pardon of the people's sins Christ's death on the cross means that God can forgive sins. Alternate translation: "he would make it possible for God to forgive people's sins" HEB 2 18 xde4 figs-activepassive πειρασθείς 1 was tempted This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Satan tempted him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 2 18 a3a6 figs-activepassive πειραζομένοις 1 who are tempted This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom Satan is tempting" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Brothers

The author probably uses the term "brothers" to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Harden your hearts

A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him.
+HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term "brothers" to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harden your hearts

A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him.
HEB 3 1 m1cv 0 Connecting Statement: This second warning is longer and more detailed and includes chapters 3 and 4. The writer begins by showing that Christ is better than his servant Moses. HEB 3 1 tp7e figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ ἅγιοι 1 holy brothers Here "brothers" refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: "holy brothers and sisters" or "my holy fellow believers" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 3 1 af15 figs-metonymy κλήσεως κλήσεως ἐπουρανίου μέτοχοι 1 you share in a heavenly calling Here "heavenly" represents God. Alternate translation: "God has called us together" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ HEB 3 17 aha2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη 1 forty years " HEB 3 18 l1gc figs-rquestion 0 To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him? The author uses this question to teach his readers. Alternate translation: "And it was to those who disobeyed that he swore they would not enter his rest." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 3 18 q16u figs-metaphor μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰσελεύσεσθαι τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they would not enter his rest The peace and security provided by God are spoken of as if they were rest that he can give, and as if they were a place to which people could go. Alternate translation: "they would not enter the place of rest" or "they would not experience his blessings of rest" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 19 x18z figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 because of unbelief The abstract noun "unbelief" can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: "because they did not believe him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### God's rest

The word "rest" seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)).
+HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God's rest

The word "rest" seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)).
HEB 4 1 n98m 0 Connecting Statement: Chapter 4 continues the warning to believers starting in [Hebrews 3:7](../03/07.md). God, through the writer, gives believers a rest of which God's rest in the creation of the world is a picture. HEB 4 1 ay25 οὖν 1 Therefore "Because what I have just said is true" or "Since God will certainly punish those who do not obey" HEB 4 1 zta2 figs-metaphor 0 none of you might seem to have failed to reach the promise left behind for you to enter God's rest God's promise is spoken of as if it were a gift that God left behind when he visited the people. Alternate translation: "none of you fail to enter into God's rest, which he promised to us" or "God will allow you all to enter into his rest as he promised us" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ HEB 4 15 d26h figs-activepassive 0 who has in all ways been tempted as we are T HEB 4 15 fve3 0 he is without sin "he did not sin" HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 to the throne of grace "to God's throne, where there is grace." Here "throne" refers to God ruling as king. Alternate translation: "to where our gracious God is sitting on his throne" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 16 py6d figs-metaphor λάβωμεν ἔλεος καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of need Here "mercy" and "grace" are spoken of as if they were objects that can be given or can be found. Alternate translation: "God may be merciful and gracious and help us in time of need" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Milk and solid food

The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and solid food

The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
HEB 5 1 dn18 0 Connecting Statement: The writer describes the sinfulness of the Old Testament priests, then he shows that Christ has a better kind of priesthood, not based on Aaron's priesthood but on the priesthood of Melchizedek. HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive ἐξ ἀνθρώπων λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom God chooses from among the people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 1 ndz7 figs-activepassive καθίσταται 1 is appointed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God appoints" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ HEB 5 12 yk1q figs-metaphor γάλακτος, οὐ στερεᾶς τροφῆ HEB 5 13 nhx3 figs-metonymy μετέχων γάλακτος 1 takes milk Here "takes" stands for "drinks." Alternate translation: "drinks milk" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 13 vl7k figs-metaphor νήπιος γάρ ἐστιν 1 because he is still a little child Spiritual maturity is compared with the kind of food that a growing child eats. Solid food is not for a tiny baby, and that is a figure describing a young Christian who only learns simple truths; but later, more solid food is given to the little child, just as when a person matures he can learn about matters that are more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 14 e3yh figs-metonymy τῶν διὰ τὴν ἕξιν τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα ἐχόντων πρὸς διάκρισιν καλοῦ τε κακοῦ 1 who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil People trained to understand something are spoken of as if their ability to understand had been trained. Alternate translation: "who are mature and can distinguish between good and evil" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 06 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham's descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham's descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
+HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 06 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham's descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham's descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
HEB 6 1 f1nk 0 Connecting Statement: The writer continues with what immature Hebrew believers need to do to become mature Christians. He reminds them of the foundational teachings. HEB 6 1 i4xr figs-metaphor 0 let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity This speaks about the basic teachings as if they were the beginning of a journey and the mature teachings as if they were the end of a journey. Alternate translation: "let us stop only discussing what we first learned and start understanding more mature teachings as well" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 thw8 figs-metaphor 0 Let us not lay again the foundation ... of faith in God Basic teachings are spoken of as if they were a building whose construction begins by laying a foundation. Alternate translation: "Let us not repeat the basic teachings ... of faith in God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ HEB 6 19 vdt3 figs-doublet ἄγκυραν ἄγκυραν ἀσφαλῆ κα HEB 6 19 d223 figs-personification 0 hope that enters into the inner place behind the curtain Confidence is spoken of as if it were a person who could go into the most holy place of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 6 19 aj2m figs-metaphor τὸ ἐσώτερον 1 the inner place This was the most holy place in the temple. It was thought to be the place where God was most intensely present among his people. In this passage, this place stands for heaven and God's throne room. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 20 zgj6 κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the order of Melchizedek This means that Christ as a priest has things in common with Melchizedek as a priest. Alternate translation: "in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest" -HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
+HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.
HEB 7 1 mwy8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer of Hebrews continues his comparison of Jesus as priest to Melchizedek as priest. HEB 7 1 rfc9 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 Salem This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings This is refers to when Abraham and his men went and defeated the armies of four kings in order to rescue his nephew, Lot, and his family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ HEB 7 28 u5ny ἀνθρώπους ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν 1 men who HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy 0 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son The "word of the oath" represents God who made the oath. Alternate translation: "God appointed a Son by his oath, which he made after he gave the law" or "after he had given the law, God swore an oath and appointed his Son" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 28 msa4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱόν 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 7 28 fkl3 figs-activepassive τὸν τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "who has completely obeyed God and become mature" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 08 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### New covenant

The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
+HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 08 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New covenant

The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
HEB 8 1 nb8q 0 Connecting Statement: The writer, having shown that Christ's priesthood is better than the earthly priesthood, shows that the earthly priesthood was a pattern of heavenly things. Christ has a superior ministry, a superior covenant. HEB 8 1 tw7l δὲ 1 Now This does not mean "at this moment," but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. HEB 8 1 z4dh figs-exclusive λεγομένοις 1 we are saying Even though the author uses the plural pronoun "we," he is most likely referring only to himself. Because the writer does not include his readers here, the word "we" is exclusive. Alternate translation: "I am saying" or "I am writing" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) @@ -391,7 +391,7 @@ HEB 8 11 wne2 figs-doublet 0 neighbor ... brother Both of these refer to fellow HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-metonymy 0 Know the Lord ... will all know me "Know" here stands for acknowledge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 8 12 cu1b figs-metonymy ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν 1 toward their evil deeds This stands for the people who committed these evil deeds. Alternate translation: "to those who did evil deeds" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 8 12 a1xr figs-metonymy τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν μὴ μνησθῶ μνησθῶ ἔτι 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here "remember" stands for "think about." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 09 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Will

A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person's property after he dies.

#### Blood

In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal's body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

#### Return of Christ

Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people's sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### First covenant

This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate "the first covenant" as "the earlier covenant."
+HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Will

A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person's property after he dies.

### Blood

In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal's body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Return of Christ

Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people's sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### First covenant

This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate "the first covenant" as "the earlier covenant."
HEB 9 1 af6x 0 Connecting Statement: The writer makes clear to these Jewish believers that the laws and the tabernacle of the old covenant were only pictures of the better, new covenant. HEB 9 1 av9i 0 Now This word marks a new part of the teaching. HEB 9 1 d3vs 0 first covenant See how you translated this in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md). @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ HEB 9 26 dq7m figs-metaphor ἀθέτησιν ἁμαρτίας διὰ τῆς HEB 9 28 p8b6 figs-activepassive ὁ Χριστός ἅπαξ προσενεχθεὶς 1 Christ was offered once This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Christ offered himself once" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 28 hv2t figs-metaphor προσενεχθεὶς τὸ ἁμαρτίας 1 to take away the sins The act of making us innocent rather than guilty for our sins is spoken of as if our sins were physical objects that Christ could carry away from us. Alternate translation: "so that God would forgive the sins" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 28 p6th figs-metonymy τὸ ἁμαρτίας 1 the sins Here "sins" mean the guilt that people have before God because of the sins they committed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus' sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### God's judgment and reward

Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins"
The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices "take away sins." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

#### "The covenant that I will make"
It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
+HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, the writer finishes describing how Jesus' sacrifice was better than the sacrifices offered in the Temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 10:5-7, 15-17, 37-38, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God's judgment and reward

Holy living is important for Christians. God will hold people accountable for how they lived their Christian life. Even though there will not be eternal condemnation for Christians, ungodly actions do and will have consequences. In addition, faithful living will be rewarded. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins"
The sacrifices themselves had no redeeming power. They were effective because they were a display of faith, which was credited to the person offering the sacrifice. It was ultimately the sacrifice of Jesus which then makes these sacrifices "take away sins." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### "The covenant that I will make"
It is unclear whether this prophecy was being fulfilled as the author was writing or whether it was to occur later. The translator should try to avoid making a claim about the time this covenant begins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])
HEB 10 1 kwq1 0 Connecting Statement: The writer shows the weakness of the law and its sacrifices, why God gave the law, and the perfection of the new priesthood and Christ's sacrifice. HEB 10 1 kj83 figs-metaphor σκιὰν ἔχων ὁ νόμος τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν 1 the law is only a shadow of the good things to come This speaks about the law as if it were a shadow. The author means the law is not the good things that God had promised. It only hints at the good things that God is going to do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 1 r6ly οὐκ αὐτὴν τὴν τὴν εἰκόνα πραγμάτων τοὺς 1 not the real forms of those things themselves "not the real things themselves" @@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ HEB 10 38 r8mh 0 My righteous ... I will Here "My" and "I" refer to God. HEB 10 38 h5bw ὑποστείληται 1 shrinks back stops doing the good thing he is doing HEB 10 39 i9zh figs-metaphor ὑποστολῆς εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 who turn back to destruction A person who loses courage and faith are spoken of as if he were stepping back in fear from something. And "destruction" is spoken of as if it were a destination. Alternate translation: "who stop trusting God, which will cause him to destroy us" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 39 dv8y figs-metaphor εἰς περιποίησιν ψυχῆς 1 for keeping our soul Living eternally with God is spoken of as if it were keeping one's soul. Here "soul" refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: ", which will result in us living with God forever" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes
### Structure

The writer begins this chapter by telling what faith is. Then he gives many examples of people who had faith and how they lived.

### Important concepts in this chapter

#### Faith

In both the old and new covenants, God required faith. Some people with faith performed miracles and were very powerful. Other people with faith suffered greatly.
+HEB 11 intro g4cc 0 # Hebrews 11 General Notes
## Structure

The writer begins this chapter by telling what faith is. Then he gives many examples of people who had faith and how they lived.

## Important concepts in this chapter

### Faith

In both the old and new covenants, God required faith. Some people with faith performed miracles and were very powerful. Other people with faith suffered greatly.
HEB 11 1 a371 0 Connecting Statement: The author tells three things about faith in this brief introduction. HEB 11 1 d95i δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Here the author starts to explain the meaning of "faith." HEB 11 1 dne9 ἔστιν πίστις ἐλπιζομένων ὑπόστασις 1 faith is being sure of the things hoped for This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "when we have faith, we are sure of the things we hope for" or "faith is what allows a person to confidently expect certain things" @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ HEB 11 38 li8j σπηλαίοις καὶ ὀπαῖς τῆς γῆς 1 caves HEB 11 39 l5wd figs-activepassive 0 Although all these people were approved by God because of their faith, they did not receive the promise This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God honored all these because of their faith, but they did not themselves receive what God had promised" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 39 vgw2 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 the promise This expression stands for "what God had promised them." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 40 p9uu figs-activepassive 0 so that without us, they would not be made perfect This can be stated in positive and active form. Alternate translation: "in order that God would perfect us and them together" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 12 intro h1qb 0 # Hebrews 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

After telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Discipline

God wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
+HEB 12 intro h1qb 0 # Hebrews 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

After telling of the value discipline, the author begins a series of exhortations. (See; [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/exhort]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:5-6, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Discipline

God wants his people to do what is right. When they do what is wrong, he needs to correct or punish them. He does this just as earthly fathers correct and punish children whom they love. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])
HEB 12 1 jg6w figs-inclusive 0 General Information: The words "we" and "us" refer to the author and his readers. The word "you" is plural and here refers to the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) HEB 12 1 k8mr 0 Connecting Statement: Because of this great number of Old Testament believers, the author talks of the life of faith that believers should live with Jesus as their example. HEB 12 1 f6u9 figs-metaphor 0 we are surrounded by such a large cloud of witnesses The writer speaks about the Old Testament believers as if they were a cloud that surrounded the present-day believers. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "such a large cloud of witnesses surrounds us" or "there are so many examples of faithful people about whom we learn in the scriptures" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ HEB 12 28 m44c writing-connectingwords βασιλείαν παραλαμβάνο HEB 12 28 btf6 χάριν 1 let us be grateful "let us give thanks" HEB 12 28 f382 figs-doublet μετὰ εὐλαβείας καὶ δέους 1 with reverence and awe The words "reverence" and "awe" share similar meanings and emphasize the greatness of reverence due to God. Alternate translation: "with great respect and dread" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 12 29 f899 figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν πῦρ πῦρ καταναλίσκον 1 our God is a consuming fire God is spoken of here as if he were a fire that can burn up anything. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 13 intro c8gg 0 # Hebrews 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The author finishes the list of exhortations he began in chapter 12. Then he asks the readers to pray for him and ends the letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:6, which are words from the Old Testament.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Hospitality

God wants his people to invite other people to come to their homes to eat food and even to sleep. His people should do this even if they do not know well the people they are inviting. In the Old Testament, Abraham and his nephew Lot both showed hospitality to people they did not know. Abraham served a costly meal to them, and then Lot invited them to sleep in his house. They learned later that those people were actually angels.
+HEB 13 intro c8gg 0 # Hebrews 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The author finishes the list of exhortations he began in chapter 12. Then he asks the readers to pray for him and ends the letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:6, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hospitality

God wants his people to invite other people to come to their homes to eat food and even to sleep. His people should do this even if they do not know well the people they are inviting. In the Old Testament, Abraham and his nephew Lot both showed hospitality to people they did not know. Abraham served a costly meal to them, and then Lot invited them to sleep in his house. They learned later that those people were actually angels.
HEB 13 1 sf1n 0 Connecting Statement: In this closing section, the author gives specific instructions to believers on how they are supposed to live. HEB 13 1 g819 ἡ φιλαδελφία μενέτω μενέτω 1 Let brotherly love continue "Continue to show your love for other believers as you would for a member of your family" HEB 13 2 rh7r figs-litotes μὴ ἐπιλανθάνεσθε ἐπιλανθάνεσθε 1 Do not forget This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "Be sure to remember" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 6b12d2bbf..bc0f52798 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
1. Testing and maturity (1:2-18)
1. Hearing and doing the Word of God (1:19-27)
1. True faith seen in works
- Word of God (1:19-27)
- Royal law of love (2:1-13)
- Works (2:14-26)
1. Difficulties in community
- Dangers of the tongue (3:1-12)
- Wisdom from above (3:13-18)
- Worldly desires (4:1-12)
1. God's perspective on your decisions
- Boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
- Warning about riches (5:1-6)
- Suffering with patience (5:7-11)
1. Closing exhortations
- Oaths (5:12)
- Prayer and healing (5:13-18)
- Care for one another (5:19-20)

### Who wrote the Book of James?

The author identifies himself as James. This was probably James, the half-brother of Jesus. James was a leader in the early church and was part of the Jerusalem council. The Apostle Paul also called him a "pillar" of the church.

This is not the same man as the Apostle James. The Apostle James was killed before this letter was written.

### What is the Book of James about?

In this letter, James encouraged believers who were suffering. He told them know that God uses their suffering to help them become mature Christians. James also told them of the need for believers to do good deeds. He wrote much in this letter about how believers should live and treat one another. For example, he commanded them to treat one another fairly, to not fight with one another, and to use riches wisely.

James taught his readers by using many examples from nature such as in 1:6, 11 and 3:1-12. Also, many parts of this letter are similar to what Jesus wrote in the Sermon on the Mount (Mat 5-7).

### Who were the "twelve tribes in the dispersion"?

James said he was writing to the "twelve tribes in the dispersion" (1:1). Some scholars think that James was writing to Jewish Christians. Other scholars think that James was writing to all Christians in general. This letter is known as one of the "General Epistles" since it was not written to a specific church or individual.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "James." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "A Letter from James" or "The Letter James Wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This can be confusing. But a better understanding of what Paul and James taught shows that they agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. And they both taught that true faith will cause a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the Book of James?

The letter quickly changes topics. Sometimes James does not tell the readers that he is about to change topics. It is acceptable to allow the verses to appear disconnected from each other. It may make sense to set the passages apart by starting a new line or putting a space between topics.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of James?

* "Do you want to know, foolish man, that faith without works is useless?" (2:20). The ULT, UST, and modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, "Do you want to know, foolish man, that faith without works is dead?" If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

James formally introduces this letter in verse 1. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Testing and temptation

These two words occur together in ([James 1:12-13](./12.md)). Both words speak of a person who is able to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between them is important. God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil.

#### Crowns

The crown that a man who passes the test receives is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

James uses many metaphors in this chapter, and you will need to understand the material on the metaphor page before you can translate them well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "To the twelve tribes in the dispersion"

It is not clear to whom James wrote this letter. He calls himself a servant of the Lord Jesus Christ, so he was probably writing to Christians. But he calls his readers "the twelve tribes in the dispersion," words which usually refer to Jews. It is possible that he is using the words as a metaphor for "all people whom God has chosen" or that he wrote the letter at a time when most Christians had grown up as Jews.
+JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

James formally introduces this letter in verse 1. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Testing and temptation

These two words occur together in ([James 1:12-13](./12.md)). Both words speak of a person who is able to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between them is important. God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil.

### Crowns

The crown that a man who passes the test receives is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

James uses many metaphors in this chapter, and you will need to understand the material on the metaphor page before you can translate them well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "To the twelve tribes in the dispersion"

It is not clear to whom James wrote this letter. He calls himself a servant of the Lord Jesus Christ, so he was probably writing to Christians. But he calls his readers "the twelve tribes in the dispersion," words which usually refer to Jews. It is possible that he is using the words as a metaphor for "all people whom God has chosen" or that he wrote the letter at a time when most Christians had grown up as Jews.
JAS 1 1 ssc8 0 General Information: The apostle James writes this letter to all the Christians. Many of them were Jews, and they lived in many different places. JAS 1 1 pkt2 figs-explicit Ἰάκωβος, Θεοῦ καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δοῦλος 1 James, a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ The phrase "this letter is from" is implied. Alternate translation: "This letter is from James, a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 1 l4i7 figs-synecdoche ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes Possible meanings are 1) this is a synecdoche for Jewish Christians, or 2) this is a metaphor for all Christians. Alternate translation: "to God's faithful people" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ JAS 1 27 skf4 figs-metaphor 0 before our God and Father directed to God (See: [ JAS 1 27 iiv2 ὀρφανοὺς 1 the fatherless "the orphans" JAS 1 27 r8nj ἐν τῇ θλίψει αὐτῶν 1 in their affliction The fatherless and widows are suffering because their fathers or husbands have died. JAS 1 27 nmf7 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world Sin in the world is spoken of as something dirty that can stain a person. Alternate translation: "to not allow the evil in the world to cause oneself to sin" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 intro f5zd 0 # James 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Favoritism

Some of James's readers treated rich and powerful people well and treated poor people badly. This is called favoritism, and James tells them that this is wrong. God wants his people to treat both rich people and poor people well.

#### Justification

Justification is what happens when God makes a person righteous. James says here that God makes righteous or justifies people who do good works along with having faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Quotation marks

The words "Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith by my works" are hard to understand. Some people think that they are what "someone may say," like the words in the quotation marks. Most versions translate them as words that James is saying back to that "someone."

#### "You have ... I have"

Some people think that the words "you" and "I" are metonyms for "some people" and "other people." If they are correct, verse 18 could be translated, "Someone may say, 'Some people have faith and other people have works. Not everyone has both.'" If the next sentence is also what "someone may say," it could be translated "Some people show their faith without works, and other people show their faith by their works. Both have faith." In both cases, the reader will understand only if you add the extra sentence. It is probably best to translate as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JAS 2 intro f5zd 0 # James 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Favoritism

Some of James's readers treated rich and powerful people well and treated poor people badly. This is called favoritism, and James tells them that this is wrong. God wants his people to treat both rich people and poor people well.

### Justification

Justification is what happens when God makes a person righteous. James says here that God makes righteous or justifies people who do good works along with having faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Quotation marks

The words "Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith by my works" are hard to understand. Some people think that they are what "someone may say," like the words in the quotation marks. Most versions translate them as words that James is saying back to that "someone."

### "You have ... I have"

Some people think that the words "you" and "I" are metonyms for "some people" and "other people." If they are correct, verse 18 could be translated, "Someone may say, 'Some people have faith and other people have works. Not everyone has both.'" If the next sentence is also what "someone may say," it could be translated "Some people show their faith without works, and other people show their faith by their works. Both have faith." In both cases, the reader will understand only if you add the extra sentence. It is probably best to translate as the ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
JAS 2 1 ici9 0 Connecting Statement: James continues to tell the scattered Jewish believers how to live by loving one another and reminds them not to favor rich people over poor brothers. JAS 2 1 kab4 ἀδελφοί μου 1 My brothers James considers his audience to be Jewish believers. Alternate translation: "My fellow believers" or "My brothers and sisters in Christ" JAS 2 1 qs2x figs-metaphor ἔχετε τὴν πίστιν τοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 hold to faith in our Lord Jesus Christ Believing in Jesus Christ is spoken of as if it were an object that one could hold onto. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ JAS 2 25 bx6i figs-metaphor ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη 1 justified by JAS 2 25 af9u ἀγγέλους 1 messengers people who bring news from another place JAS 2 25 xm5m ἑτέρᾳ ὁδῷ ὁδῷ ἐκβαλοῦσα 1 sent them away by another road "then helped them escape and leave the city" JAS 2 26 uum8 figs-metaphor , ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν οὕτως καὶ ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 For as the body apart from the spirit is dead, even so faith apart from works is dead James is speaking of faith without works as if it were a dead body without the spirit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 intro py3p 0 # James 03 General Notes
### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

James teaches his readers that they should live to please God by reminding them of things that they know from everyday life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JAS 3 intro py3p 0 # James 03 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

James teaches his readers that they should live to please God by reminding them of things that they know from everyday life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
JAS 3 1 p4uu figs-genericnoun 0 Not many of you James is making a generalized statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JAS 3 1 c36b ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers "my fellow believers" JAS 3 1 aw5f figs-explicit 0 we who teach will be judged more strictly This passage speaks of stricter judgment that will come from God on those who teach others about him. Alternate translation: "God will judge us who teach more severely because we know his word better than some people whom we have taught" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ JAS 3 17 hfh9 figs-metaphor μεστὴ ἐλέους καὶ καρπῶν ἀ JAS 3 17 by2l 0 and sincere "and honest" or "and truthful" JAS 3 18 md56 figs-metaphor καρπὸς δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 The fruit of righteousness is sown in peace among those who make peace People making peace is spoken of as if they were sowing seeds, and righteousness is spoken of as if it were the fruit that grows up as a result of making peace. Alternate translation: "The result of making peace is righteousness" or "Those who work peacefully to help people live in peace produce righteousness" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 18 htr1 figs-abstractnouns ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 make peace The abstract noun "peace" can be stated as "peacefully." Alternate translation: "cause people to live peacefully" or "help people not to be angry with each other" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 04 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

#### Law

James probably uses this word in [James 4:11](../../jas/04/11.md) to refer to "the royal law" ([James 2:8](../../jas/02/08.md)).

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Rhetorical Questions

James asks many questions because he wants his readers to think about how they are living. He wants to correct and teach them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Humble

This word probably usually refers to people who are not proud. James uses the word here to refer to people who are not proud and who also trust in Jesus and obey him.
+JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Law

James probably uses this word in [James 4:11](../../jas/04/11.md) to refer to "the royal law" ([James 2:8](../../jas/02/08.md)).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

James asks many questions because he wants his readers to think about how they are living. He wants to correct and teach them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Humble

This word probably usually refers to people who are not proud. James uses the word here to refer to people who are not proud and who also trust in Jesus and obey him.
JAS 4 1 q3pd 0 General Information: In this section, the words "yourselves," "your," and "you" are plural and refer to the believers to whom James writes. JAS 4 1 k21j 0 Connecting Statement: James rebukes these believers for their worldliness and their lack of humility. He again urges them to watch how they speak to and about each other. JAS 4 1 ub82 figs-doublet 0 Where do quarrels and disputes among you come from? The abstract nouns "quarrels" and "disputes" mean basically the same thing and can be translated with verbs. Alternate translation: "Why do you quarrel and dispute among yourselves?" or "Why do you fight among yourselves?" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ JAS 4 14 a9v2 figs-metaphor ἀτμὶς γάρ ἐστε ἡ πρὸς ὀλί JAS 4 15 gj65 ἀντὶ, τοῦ λέγειν ὑμᾶς 1 Instead, you should say "Instead, your attitude should be" JAS 4 15 e1il ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 we will live and do this or that "we will live long enough to do what we have planned to do." The word "we" does not directly refer to James or his audience but is part of the example of how James' audience should consider the future. JAS 4 17 q84z 0 for anyone who knows to do good but does not do it, for him it is sin Anyone who fails to do the good he knows he should do is guilty of sin. -JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Eternity
This chapter contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. It is also important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

#### Oaths
Scholars are divided over whether this passage teaches all oaths are wrong. Most scholars believe some oaths are permissible and James instead is teaching Christians to have integrity.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Elijah
This story will be difficult to understand if the books of 1 and 2 Kings and 1 and 2 Chronicles have not yet been translated.

#### "Save his soul from death"
This probably teaches that the person who stops their sinful lifestyle will not be punished with physical death as a consequence of their sin. On the other hand, some scholars believe this passage teaches about eternal salvation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Eternity
This chapter contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. It is also important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths
Scholars are divided over whether this passage teaches all oaths are wrong. Most scholars believe some oaths are permissible and James instead is teaching Christians to have integrity.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah
This story will be difficult to understand if the books of 1 and 2 Kings and 1 and 2 Chronicles have not yet been translated.

### "Save his soul from death"
This probably teaches that the person who stops their sinful lifestyle will not be punished with physical death as a consequence of their sin. On the other hand, some scholars believe this passage teaches about eternal salvation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
JAS 5 1 phs3 0 Connecting Statement: James warns rich people about their focus on pleasure and riches. JAS 5 1 gel9 figs-explicit οἱ πλούσιοι 1 you who are rich Possible meanings are 1) James is giving a strong warning to wealthy believers or 2) James is talking about wealthy unbelievers. Alternate translation: "you who are rich and say you honor God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 1 l3wd figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ ταῖς ταλαιπωρίαις ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐπερχομέναις 1 because of the miseries coming on you James states that these people will suffer terribly in the future and writes as if their sufferings were objects that were coming toward them. The abstract noun "miseries" can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: "because you will suffer terribly in the future" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 46164c381..a03b92dfc 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God's salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)


### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of "encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God" (5:12).
He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title "1 Peter" or "First Peter." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "The First Letter from Peter" or "The First Letter Peter Wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of "Babylon" (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural "you"
In this book, the word "I" refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word "you" is always plural and refers to Peter's audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?

* "You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart" (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, "You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart."

If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God's people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God's people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

#### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

#### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](./06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them "in the last time" ([1 Peter 1:5](./05.md))
+1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God's people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God's people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](./06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them "in the last time" ([1 Peter 1:5](./05.md))
1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing. 1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 the foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 1 qkl8 0 Cappadocia ... Bithynia Along with the other places that Peter mentions, "Cappadocia" and "Bithynia" were Roman provinces located in what is now the country of Turkey. @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 24 hd2f figs-simile δόξα ... ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου 1 glory is like the wild flower of the grass Here the word "glory" refers to beauty or goodness. Isaiah compares the things that people consider to be good or beautiful about humanity to flowers that die quickly. Alternate translation: "goodness soon stops, just as flowers soon die" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 25 aba2 τὸ ... ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord "the message that comes from the Lord" 1PE 1 25 s11j figs-activepassive 0 the gospel that was proclaimed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the gospel that we proclaimed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to "long for pure spiritual milk," he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother's milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God's word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to "long for pure spiritual milk," he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother's milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God's word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 2 1 cch5 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues teaching his readers about holiness and obedience. 1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι οὖν πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 Therefore put aside all evil, all deceit, hypocrisy, envy, and all slander These sinful actions are spoken of as if they were objects that people could throw away. The word "Therefore" here refers back to everything that Peter has said about being holy and obedient. Alternate translation: "So then, get rid of everything that is evil, and hypocrisy, and envy, and all slander" or "So then, stop being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-metaphor ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk Peter speaks of his readers as if they were babies. Babies requires very pure food, which they can digest easily. In the same way, believers need pure teaching from God's word. Alternate translation: "Just as babies long for their mother's breast milk, so you must yearn for pure spiritual milk" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 By his bruises you have been healed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has healed you because people bruised him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε ... ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you had been wandering away like lost sheep Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a shepherd. Just as a shepherd protects his sheep, Jesus protects those who trust in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Outward ornaments"

Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.

#### Unity

Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Outward ornaments"

Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.

### Unity

Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to women who are wives. 1PE 3 1 cj7z ὁμοίως, γυναῖκες, ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 In this way, you who are wives should submit to your own husbands Just as believers are to "Obey every human authority" ([1 Peter 2:13](../02/13.md)) and servants are to "be subject" to their masters ([1 Peter 2:18](../02/18.md)), wives are to submit to their husbands. The words "Obey," "be subject," and "submit" translate the same word. 1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some men are disobedient to the word Here "the word" refers to the gospel message. To disobey means that they do not believe. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1 Peter 2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: "some men do not believe the message about Jesus" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 21 jti3 δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ "because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ." This phrase completes the thought, "This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now." 1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 Christ is at the right hand of God To be at the "right hand of God" is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. AT: "Christ is beside God in the place of honor and authority" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 22 f6jq ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ 1 submit to him "submit to Jesus Christ" -1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term "Gentiles" to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. "Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry" were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

#### Martyrdom
It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "Let it" and "Let none" and "Let him" and "Let those"

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
+1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term "Gentiles" to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. "Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry" were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom
It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "Let it" and "Let none" and "Let him" and "Let those"

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do.
1PE 4 1 b8d4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ's sufferings. 1PE 4 1 ess6 σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh "in his body" 1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention The phrase "arm yourselves" makes readers think of soldiers who get their weapons ready for battle. It also pictures "the same intention" as a weapon or perhaps as a piece of armor. Here this metaphor means that believers should be determined in their mind to suffer as Jesus did. Alternate translation: "prepare yourselves with the same thoughts that Christ had" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 18 wb4v figs-doublet ὁ ... ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς 1 the ungodly and the sinner The words "ungodly" and "sinner" mean basically the same thing and emphasize the wickedness of these people. Alternate translation: "ungodly sinners" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 4 19 qm3u figs-synecdoche παρατιθέσθωσαν τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 entrust their souls Here the word "souls" refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: "entrust themselves" or "entrust their lives" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 4 19 wih1 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ 1 in well-doing The abstract noun "well-doing" can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: "while they do good" or "while they live rightly" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Crowns

The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Lion

All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God's people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God's people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

#### Babylon

Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Crowns

The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Lion

All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God's people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God's people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Babylon

Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1PE 5 1 s8fr 0 General Information: Peter speaks specifically to men who are elders. 1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 the glory that will be revealed This is a reference to Christ's second coming. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the glory of Christ that God will reveal" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 5 2 a5s7 figs-metaphor ποιμάνατε τὸ ἐν ὑμῖν ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Be shepherds of God's flock Peter speaks of the believers as a flock of sheep and the elders as the shepherds who care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index ddd718dfd..fabc68608 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "2 Peter" or "Second Peter." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "The Second Letter from Peter" or "The Second Letter Peter Wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

#### Singular and plural "you"

In this book, the word "I" refers to Peter. Also, the word "you" is always plural and refers to Peter's audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment" (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, "to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment."
* "They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you" (2:13). Some versions have, "They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts."
* "Beor" (2:15). Some other versions read, "Bosor."
* "The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed" (3:10). Other versions have, "The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Knowledge of God
Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, "knowledge" is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

#### Living godly lives
Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### The truth of Scripture
Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God's message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
+2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Knowledge of God
Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, "knowledge" is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives
Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The truth of Scripture
Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God's message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son.
2PE 1 1 n1di 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to. 2PE 1 1 v381 δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 slave and apostle of Jesus Christ Peter speaks of being Jesus Christ's servant. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ's apostle. 2PE 1 1 yy7j figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον ... λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 to those who have received the same precious faith That these people have received faith implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: "to those to whom God has given the same precious faith" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Above all, you must understand "Most importantly, you must understand" 2PE 1 20 s4k2 προφητεία ... ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται 1 no prophecy comes from someone's own interpretation Possible meanings are 1) the prophets did not make their prophecies on their own or 2) people must rely on the Holy Spirit to understand the prophecies or 3) people must interpret the prophecies with the help of the entire Christian community of believers. 2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God when they were carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit was carrying them from one place to another. Alternate translation: "men spoke from God as the Holy Spirit directed them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Flesh

"Flesh" is a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. "Flesh" represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

#### Implicit information
There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

"Flesh" is a metaphor for a person's sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. "Flesh" represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information
There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2PE 2 1 us8u 0 General Information: Peter begins to warn the believers about false teachers. 2PE 2 1 l2cg ἐγένοντο ... ψευδοπροφῆται ἐν τῷ λαῷ ... καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσονται ψευδοδιδάσκαλοι 1 False prophets came to the people, and false teachers will also come to you Just as false prophets came deceiving Israel with their words, so will false teachers come teaching lies about Christ. 2PE 2 1 tbz8 αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 destructive heresies The word "heresies" refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. These heresies destroy the faith of those who believe them. @@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 21 blr5 figs-activepassive τῆς ... παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 the holy commandment delivered to them This can be stated in active terms. Alternate translation: "the holy commandment that God delivered to them" or "the holy commandment that God made sure that they received" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 22 hqr3 συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This proverb is true for them "This proverb applies to them" or "This proverb describes them" 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα”, καί," ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig returns to the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate how the false teachers, although they have known "the way of righteousness," have turned back to the things that make them morally and spiritually impure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Fire
People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

#### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile "like a thief in the night" means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire
People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord
The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile "like a thief in the night" means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2PE 3 1 n92f 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about the last days. 2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ... τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 to stir up your sincere mind Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: "to cause you to think pure thoughts" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 2 gxj7 figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 the words spoken in the past by the holy prophets This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the words that the holy prophets spoke in the past" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 3ce2cf089..c2ec76bac 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 John

1. Introduction (1:1-4)
1. Christian living (1:5-3:10)
1. The command to love one another (3:11-5:12)
1. Conclusion (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 John?

This book does not name the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author. He was also wrote of the Gospel of John.

### What is the Book of 1 John about?

John wrote this letter to Christians at a time when false teachers were troubling them. John wrote this letter because he wanted to prevent believers from sinning. He wanted to protect believers from false teachings. And he wanted to assure believers that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, "1 John" or "First John." Or they may choose a clearer title, such as "The First Letter From John" or "The First Letter John Wrote." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people that John spoke against?

The people John spoke against were possibly those who would become known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since they believed Jesus was divine, they denied that he was truly human. This is because they thought God would not become human since the physical body is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do the words "remain," "reside," and "abide" mean in 1 John?

John often used the words "remain," "reside," and "abide" as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus' word "remained" in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person "remained" in the other person. Christians are said to "remain" in Christ and in God. The Father is said to "remain" in the Son, and the Son is said to "remain" in the Father. The Son is said to "remain" in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to "remain" in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, John intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with God when he said, "He who says he remains in God" (1 John 2:6). The UST says, "If we say that we are in union with God," but translators will often have to find other expressions that communicate these ideas well.

In the passage, "the word of God remains in you" (1 John 2:13), the UST expresses this idea as, "you continue to obey what God commands." Many translators will find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 John?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "And we are writing these things to you so that our joy may be complete" (1:4). Some older versions have, "And we are writing these things to you so that your joy may be complete."
* "And you all know the truth" (2:20). Other modern versions have, "And you all have knowledge." Some older versions have, "and you know all things."
* "and this is what we are!" (3:1). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Some older versions omit this phrase.
* "and every spirit that does not acknowledge Jesus is not from God" (4:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions have this reading. Some older versions read, "and every spirit that does not acknowledge that Jesus has come in the flesh is not of God."

For the following passage, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT does. However, if in the translators' region, there are older versions of the Bible that include this passage, the translators can include it. If it is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it was probably not in the original version of 1 John.

* "For there are three who bear witness: the Spirit, the water, and the blood. These three are in agreement." (5:7-8) Some older versions have, "For there are three that bear witness in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit; and these three are one. And there are three that bear witness on earth: the Spirit, the water, and the blood; and these three are as one."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This is a letter that John wrote to Christians.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Christians and sin
In this chapter John teaches that all Christians are still sinners. But God continues to forgive a Christian's sins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

In this chapter John writes that God is light. Light is a metaphor for understanding and righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

John also writes about people walking in the light or in the darkness. Walking is a metaphor for behaving or living. People who walk in the light understand what is righteous and do it. People who walk in the darkness may not understand what is righteous, and they do what is sinful.
+1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This is a letter that John wrote to Christians.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christians and sin
In this chapter John teaches that all Christians are still sinners. But God continues to forgive a Christian's sins. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

In this chapter John writes that God is light. Light is a metaphor for understanding and righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

John also writes about people walking in the light or in the darkness. Walking is a metaphor for behaving or living. People who walk in the light understand what is righteous and do it. People who walk in the darkness may not understand what is righteous, and they do what is sinful.
1JN 1 1 axg6 figs-you 0 General Information: The apostle John wrote this letter to believers. All instances of "you," "your," and "yours" include all believers and are plural. Here the words "we" and "us" refer to John and those who had been with Jesus. In verses 1-2 many pronouns like "that," "which," and "it" are used. They refer to "the Word of life" and "the eternal life." But, since these are names for Jesus, you can use pronouns that refer to a person like "who," "whom" or "he." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 1 ej5x ὃ ... ἀκηκόαμεν 1 which we have heard "which we have heard him teach" 1JN 1 1 rb73 figs-parallelism 0 which we have seen ... we have looked at This is repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: "which we ourselves have seen" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 1 9 f68c figs-parallelism ἵνα ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας 1 to forgive us our sins and cleanse us from all unrighteousness These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John uses them to emphasize that God will surely forgive our sins. Alternate translation: "and will completely forgive us of what we have done wrong" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 1 10 hii2 figs-explicit ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν 1 we make him out to be a liar It is implied that a person who claims to be without sin would be calling God a liar since he said that everyone is a sinner. Alternate translation: "it is the same as calling him a liar, because he said we have all sinned" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 1 10 m3p1 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us "Word" here is a metonym for "message." Obeying and honoring God's word is spoken of as if his word were inside the believers. Alternate translation: "we do not understand God's word nor obey what he says" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 02 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Antichrist

In this chapter John writes about both a specific antichrist and many antichrists. The word "antichrist" means "opposed to Christ." The antichrist is a person who will come in the last days and imitate Jesus' work, but he will do it for evil. Before this person comes, there will be many people who work against Christ; they too are called "antichrists." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphor

There are several groups of similar metaphors that are used throughout this chapter.

Being in God is a metaphor for having fellowship with God, and God's word and truth being in people is a metaphor for people knowing and obeying God's word.

Walking is a metaphor for behaving, not knowing where one is going is a metaphor for not knowing how to behave, and stumbling is a metaphor for sinning.

The light is a metaphor for knowing and doing what is right, and darkness and blindness are metaphors for not knowing what is right and doing what is wrong.

Leading people astray is a metaphor for teaching people things that are not true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Antichrist

In this chapter John writes about both a specific antichrist and many antichrists. The word "antichrist" means "opposed to Christ." The antichrist is a person who will come in the last days and imitate Jesus' work, but he will do it for evil. Before this person comes, there will be many people who work against Christ; they too are called "antichrists." (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

There are several groups of similar metaphors that are used throughout this chapter.

Being in God is a metaphor for having fellowship with God, and God's word and truth being in people is a metaphor for people knowing and obeying God's word.

Walking is a metaphor for behaving, not knowing where one is going is a metaphor for not knowing how to behave, and stumbling is a metaphor for sinning.

The light is a metaphor for knowing and doing what is right, and darkness and blindness are metaphors for not knowing what is right and doing what is wrong.

Leading people astray is a metaphor for teaching people things that are not true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1JN 2 1 u65h figs-inclusive 0 General Information: Here the words "we" and "us" refer to John and all believers. The words "him" and "his" could refer to God the Father or to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-inclusive]]) 1JN 2 1 w9ji 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to write about fellowship and shows that it is possible because Jesus goes between believers and the Father. 1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Children John was an elderly man and their leader. He used this expression to show his love for them. Alternate translation: "My dear children in Christ" or "You who are as dear to me as my own children" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 28 d4ql μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 not be ashamed before him "not be ashamed in his presence" 1JN 2 28 x7ic ἐν ... τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 at his coming "when he comes again" 1JN 2 29 u6er ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 has been born from him "has been born of God" or "is God's child" -1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 03 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Children of God
God created all people, but people can only become children of God by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### Cain
Cain was a son of the first man, Adam, and the first woman, Eve. He was jealous of his brother and murdered him. Readers may not know who Cain was if they have not read Genesis. It may help them if you explain this to them.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "To know"
The verb "to know" is used in two different ways in this chapter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Some languages have different words for these different meanings.


#### "He who keeps God's commandments remains in him, and God remains in him"
Many scholars believe this is about remaining in God's will and is not about being saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 03 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Children of God
God created all people, but people can only become children of God by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Cain
Cain was a son of the first man, Adam, and the first woman, Eve. He was jealous of his brother and murdered him. Readers may not know who Cain was if they have not read Genesis. It may help them if you explain this to them.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "To know"
The verb "to know" is used in two different ways in this chapter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Some languages have different words for these different meanings.


### "He who keeps God's commandments remains in him, and God remains in him"
Many scholars believe this is about remaining in God's will and is not about being saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
1JN 3 1 as62 0 Connecting Statement: In this part John tells the believers about their new nature, which cannot sin. 1JN 3 1 gl8n ἴδετε ποταπὴν ἀγάπην δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Πατὴρ 1 See what kind of love the Father has given to us "Think about how our Father loves us so much" 1JN 3 1 x99a τέκνα Θεοῦ κληθῶμεν 1 we should be called children of God "the Father called us his children" @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 23 irb3 figs-abstractnouns 0 This is his commandment: that we should believe ... just as he gave us this commandment The abstract noun "commandment" can be stated as "command." Alternate translation: "This is what God commands us to do: Believe ... just as he commanded us to do" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 3 23 feq7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 3 24 we1m figs-metaphor 0 remains in him, and God remains in him To remain in someone means to continue to have fellowship with him. See how you translated "remains in God" in [1 John 2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: "continues to have fellowship with him, and God continues to have fellowship with him" or "stays joined with him, and God stays joined with him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Spirit
This word "spirit" is used in different ways in this chapter. Sometimes the word "spirit" refers to spiritual beings. Sometimes it refers to the character of something. For example "the spirit of the antichrist," "the spirit of truth," and "the spirit of error" refer to what is typical of the antichrist, truth, and error. "The Spirit" (written with a capital "S") and "the Spirit of God" refer to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Loving God
If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him, but loving others does not save us. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
+1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spirit
This word "spirit" is used in different ways in this chapter. Sometimes the word "spirit" refers to spiritual beings. Sometimes it refers to the character of something. For example "the spirit of the antichrist," "the spirit of truth," and "the spirit of error" refer to what is typical of the antichrist, truth, and error. "The Spirit" (written with a capital "S") and "the Spirit of God" refer to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God
If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him, but loving others does not save us. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])
1JN 4 1 c9jb 0 General Information: John gives a warning against false teachers who teach against Christ's having had a human body and teachers who talk the way those who love the world talk. 1JN 4 1 h1lv ἀγαπητοί, μὴ ... πιστεύετε 1 Beloved, do not believe "You people whom I love, do not believe" or "Dear friends, do not believe." See how you translated this in [1 John 2:7](../02/07.md). 1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε 1 do not believe every spirit Here, the word "spirit" refers to a spiritual power or being that gives a person a message or prophecy. Alternate translation: "do not trust every prophet who claims to have a message from a spirit" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 18 yg1r figs-activepassive ὁ ... δὲ φοβούμενος, οὐ τετελείωται ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 But the one who fears has not been made perfect in love This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "But when a person is afraid that God will punish him, his love is not complete" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 4 20 tfq3 τὸν ... ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ μισῇ 1 hates his brother "hates a fellow believer" 1JN 4 20 a8zh figs-doublenegatives ὁ γὰρ μὴ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ὃν ἑώρακεν, τὸν Θεὸν, ὃν οὐχ ἑώρακεν, οὐ δύναται ἀγαπᾶν 1 the one who does not love his brother, whom he has seen, cannot love God, whom he has not seen If two negative statements in a row are confusing, this can be translated differently. Alternate translation: "the one who hates his brother, whom he has seen, cannot love God, whom he has not seen" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 05 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Children born from God
When people believe in Jesus, God makes them his children and gives them eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

#### Christian living
People who believe in Jesus should obey God's commands and love his children.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Death
When John writes about death in this chapter, he refers to physical death. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

#### "the whole world lies in the power of the evil one"
The phrase "the evil one" refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but ultimately God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])
+1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Children born from God
When people believe in Jesus, God makes them his children and gives them eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Christian living
People who believe in Jesus should obey God's commands and love his children.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death
When John writes about death in this chapter, he refers to physical death. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

### "the whole world lies in the power of the evil one"
The phrase "the evil one" refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but ultimately God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])
1JN 5 1 nej3 0 General Information: John continues to teach his readers about God's love and the love believers are to have because they have this new nature from God. 1JN 5 1 h8if ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 is born from God "is a child of God" 1JN 5 2 ukc7 0 Because of this we know that we love God's children, when we love God and do his commandments. "When we love God and do what he commands, then we know that we love his children" diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv index 854e2d102..30c936f6d 100644 --- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation
## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Revelation

1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb's judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus' promise to return, the witness from the angels, John's closing words, Christ's message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)

### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?

The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Revelation about?

John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, "Revelation," "The Revelation of Jesus Christ," "The Revelation to Saint John," or "The Apocalypse of John." Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as "The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?

John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Are the events of Revelation past or future?

Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.

Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.

### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?

No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?

One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### How are the ideas of "holy" and "sanctify" represented in Revelation in the ULT?

The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses "holy." (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses "believer" or "believers." (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses "sanctify," "set apart," "dedicated to," or "reserved for."

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### Periods of time

John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

* "'I am the alpha and the omega,' says the Lord God, 'the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty'" (1:8). Some versions add the phrase "the Beginning and the End."
* "the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped" (5:14). Some older versions read, "the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever."
* "so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up" (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* "the one who is and who was" (11:17). Some versions add the phrase "and who is to come."
* "they are blameless" (14:5). Some versions add the phrase "before the throne of God" (14:5).
* "the one who is and who was, the Holy One" (16:5). Some older versions read, "O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be."
* "The nations will walk by the light of that city" (21:24). Some older versions read, "The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city."
* "Blessed are those who wash their robes" (22:14). Some older versions read "Blessed are those who do his commandments."
* "God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city" (22:19). Some older versions read, "God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city."

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Seven churches

John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.

#### White

The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being "white." This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

#### "Him who is, and who was, and who is to come"

God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Blood

Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus "has released us from our sins by his blood." John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "He is coming with the clouds"

Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be "with the clouds." It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or "with the clouds" in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.

#### "One like a son of man"

This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words "son of man" using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the "Son of Man."

#### "The angels of the seven churches"

The word "angels" here can also mean "messengers." This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word "angel" (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
+REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven churches

John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.

### White

The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being "white." This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### "Him who is, and who was, and who is to come"

God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Blood

Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus "has released us from our sins by his blood." John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "He is coming with the clouds"

Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be "with the clouds." It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or "with the clouds" in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.

### "One like a son of man"

This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words "son of man" using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the "Son of Man."

### "The angels of the seven churches"

The word "angels" here can also mean "messengers." This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word "angel" (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
REV 1 1 kv41 0 General Information: This is an introduction to the book of Revelation. It explains that it is a revelation from Jesus Christ and it gives a blessing to those who read it. REV 1 1 ik5v τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ 1 his servants This refers to people who believe in Christ. REV 1 1 x8bu ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐν τάχει 1 what must soon take place "the events that must happen soon" @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ REV 1 20 d6ez writing-symlanguage ἀστέρων 1 stars These stars are symbol REV 1 20 fl5d writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 lampstands The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 1 20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 the angels of the seven churches Possible meanings are that these "angels" are 1) heavenly angels who protect the seven churches or 2) human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches. REV 1 20 e25n ἑπτὰ ... ἐκκλησιῶν 1 seven churches This refers to seven churches that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). -REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 02 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the "seven letters to the seven churches." You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Poverty and wealth

The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

#### "The devil is about to"

People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

#### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel

Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### "Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches"

The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The angel of the church"

The word "angel" here can also mean "messenger." This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

#### "The words of the one who"

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add "These are" to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 02 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the "seven letters to the seven churches." You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Poverty and wealth

The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### "The devil is about to"

People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel

Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches"

The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The angel of the church"

The word "angel" here can also mean "messenger." This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### "The words of the one who"

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add "These are" to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
REV 2 1 mn8x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man's message to the angel of the church in Ephesus. REV 2 1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Possible meanings are that this "angel" is 1) a heavenly angels who protect this church or 2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) REV 2 1 i92a writing-symlanguage ἀστέρας 1 stars These stars are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ REV 2 28 c1zc καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ 1 I will also give him Here "him" ref REV 2 28 g5iy writing-symlanguage ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν 1 morning star This is a bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 2 29 ilk8 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase "has an ear" here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: "Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to" or "The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 2 29 ikm8 figs-123person 0 Let the one ... hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: "If you are willing to listen, listen to" or "If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 03 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the "seven letters to the seven churches." You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

#### Seven stars

These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### Important metaphors in this chapter

#### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking

Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

#### "Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches"

The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The angel of the church"

The word "angel" here can also mean "messenger." This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

#### "The words of the one who"

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add "These are" to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
+REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 03 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the "seven letters to the seven churches." You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Seven stars

These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking

Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### "Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches"

The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The angel of the church"

The word "angel" here can also mean "messenger." This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### "The words of the one who"

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add "These are" to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3.
REV 3 1 k6b7 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man's message to the angel of the church in Sardis. REV 3 1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Possible meanings are that this "angel" is 1) a heavenly angels who protect this church or 2) a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated "angel" in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md). REV 3 1 q7n9 translate-names Σάρδεσιν 1 Sardis This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ REV 3 21 mn2c figs-metonymy καθίσαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐν τῷ θρ REV 3 21 un17 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) REV 3 22 m13x figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase "has an ear" here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: "Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to" or "The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 3 22 mjv6 figs-123person 0 Let the one ... hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: "If you are willing to listen, listen to" or "If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 04 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.

John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald

These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John's day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.

#### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

#### Giving glory to God

God's glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Difficult images

Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 04 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.

John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald

These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John's day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Giving glory to God

God's glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult images

Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
REV 4 1 ws2q 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the throne of God. REV 4 1 vh4i μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things "After I had just seen these things" ([Revelation 2:1-3:22](../02/01.md)) REV 4 1 z8r8 figs-metaphor θύρα ἠνεῳγμένη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 an open door in heaven This expression stands for the ability that God gave John to see into heaven, at least by means of a vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ REV 4 10 sly8 translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους REV 4 10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 lay Possible meanings are 1) to place or 2) to throw down forcibly, as of something worthless ("throw," [Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully. REV 4 11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 our Lord and our God "our Lord and God." This is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne. REV 4 11 q91l figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 to receive glory and honor and power These are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: "to be praised for your glory, honor, and power" or "for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 05 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Sealed scroll

Kings and important people in John's time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, "the one who was seated on the throne" had written the scroll. Only the person called "the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David" and "the Lamb" had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])

#### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### Christian prayers

The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.

#### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

The "Lion of the tribe of Judah" and the "Root of David" are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words "Root of David" speak of Israel's King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 05 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sealed scroll

Kings and important people in John's time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, "the one who was seated on the throne" had written the scroll. Only the person called "the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David" and "the Lamb" had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Christian prayers

The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

The "Lion of the tribe of Judah" and the "Root of David" are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words "Root of David" speak of Israel's King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 5 1 txr5 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe what he saw in his vision of the throne of God. REV 5 1 w3yi καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw "After I saw those things, I saw" REV 5 1 u3br τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου 1 the one who was seated on the throne This is the same "one" as in [Revelation 4:2-3](../04/02.md). @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ REV 5 12 gnv1 0 Worthy is the Lamb who has been slaughtered "The Lamb who has REV 5 12 mt28 figs-metonymy 0 to receive power, wealth, wisdom, strength, honor, glory, and praise These are all things that the Lamb has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: "for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 5 13 sad6 figs-merism ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on the earth and under the earth This means everywhere: the place where God and the angels live, the place where people and animals live, and the place where those who have died are. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) REV 5 13 t3zy 0 To the one who sits on the throne and to the Lamb be "May he who sits on the throne and the Lamb have" -REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John's time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John's time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 6 1 i392 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the events that happened before the throne of God. The Lamb begins to open the seals on the scroll. REV 6 1 be7p ἔρχου 1 Come! This is a command to one person, apparently the rider of the white horse who is spoken of in verse 2. REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown This kind of crown was a likeness of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, probably hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads. This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: "he received a crown" or "God gave him a crown (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ REV 6 17 bd8v figs-metonymy ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς REV 6 17 i7t4 figs-metaphor ἦλθεν 1 has come Existing now is spoken of as having come. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 6 17 cq9e ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 their wrath "Their" refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb. REV 6 17 r1ta figs-metonymy τίς δύναται σταθῆναι 1 Who is able to stand? Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: "No one can survive" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 7 1 b1yl 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal. REV 7 1 id3y τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς 1 the four corners of the earth The earth is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase "the four corners" refers to the north, south, east, and west. REV 7 2 sgq7 figs-metonymy σφραγῖδα Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 the seal of the living God The word "seal" here refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God's people. Alternate translation: "the marker" or "stamp" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ REV 7 17 b5rp τὸ Ἀρνίον ... ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ θρόνου REV 7 17 bi5i figs-metaphor 0 For the Lamb ... will be their shepherd The elder speaks of the Lamb's care for his people as if it were a shepherd's care for his sheep. Alternate translation: "For the Lamb ... will be like a shepherd to them" or "For the Lamb ... will care for them as a shepherd cares for his sheep" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 m6m8 figs-metaphor ὁδηγήσει αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ζωῆς πηγὰς ὑδάτων 1 he will guide them to springs of living water The elder speaks of what gives life as if it were springs of fresh water. Alternate translation: "he will guide them like a shepherd guiding his sheep to fresh water" or "he will guide them to life like a shepherd guiding his sheep to living water" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 g3d2 figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει ὁ Θεὸς πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 God will wipe away every tear from their eyes Tears here represent sadness. Alternate translation: "God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears" or "God will cause them to not be sad anymore" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 08 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Seven seals and seven trumpets
This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Passive voice
John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator's language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

#### Similes
In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 08 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven seals and seven trumpets
This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Passive voice
John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator's language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Similes
In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 8 1 d652 0 Connecting Statement: The Lamb opens the seventh seal. REV 8 1 mh2b translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 the seventh seal This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. Alternate translation: "the next seal" or "the final seal" or "seal number seven" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) REV 8 2 fri9 figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 seven trumpets were given to them They were each given one trumpet. This can be stated in active form. Possible meanings are 1) "God gave them seven trumpets" or 2) "the Lamb gave them seven trumpets" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ REV 8 12 z936 figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου REV 8 12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 a third of them turned dark Possible meanings are 1) "one third of the time they were dark" or 2) "one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark" REV 8 12 t1ag 0 a third of the day and a third of the night had no light "there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night" or "they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night" REV 8 13 x375 figs-activepassive 0 because of the remaining trumpet ... angels This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### Woe
John describes several "woes" in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three "woes" announced at the end of Chapter 8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

#### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

#### Abaddon and Apollyon

"Abaddon" is a Hebrew word. "Apollyon" is a Greek word. Both words mean "Destroyer." John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood "Apollyon" to mean "Destroyer." So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

#### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Woe
John describes several "woes" in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three "woes" announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

### Abaddon and Apollyon

"Abaddon" is a Hebrew word. "Apollyon" is a Greek word. Both words mean "Destroyer." John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood "Apollyon" to mean "Destroyer." So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 9 1 d26c 0 Connecting Statement: The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet. REV 9 1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 I saw a star from heaven that had fallen John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall. REV 9 1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit "the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit" @@ -439,7 +439,7 @@ REV 9 18 q9mp 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the horses an REV 9 18 x4fr translate-fraction τὸ τρίτον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 A third of the people "One third of the people." See how you translated "A third" in [Revelation 8:7](../08/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) REV 9 20 xf3t figs-activepassive οἳ οὐκ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς ταύταις 1 those who were not killed by these plagues This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "those whom the plagues had not killed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 9 20 d3vn figs-distinguish 0 things that cannot see, hear, or walk This phrase reminds us that idols are not alive and do not deserve to be worshiped. But the people did not stop worshiping them. Alternate translation: "even though idols cannot see, hear, or walk" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Seven thunders
John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for "thunder" when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### "The mystery of God"
This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Simile
John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven thunders
John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for "thunder" when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### "The mystery of God"
This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile
John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 10 1 xr6f 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of a mighty angel holding a scroll. In John's vision he is viewing what is happening from earth. This takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets. REV 10 1 jj2e figs-metaphor περιβεβλημένον νεφέλην 1 He was robed in a cloud John speaks of the angel as if he were wearing a cloud as his clothing. This expression may be understood as metaphor. However, because very unusual things were often seen in visions, it might be understood as a literally true statement in its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 10 1 qax6 figs-simile τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 His face was like the sun John compares the brightness of his face with the brightness of the sun. Alternate translation: "His face was bright like the sun" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ REV 10 8 tkq7 ἤκουσα 1 I heard John heard REV 10 9 x13b λέγει μοι 1 He said to me "The angel said to me" REV 10 9 tg31 0 make ... bitter "make ... sour" or "make ... acid." This refers to a bad taste from the stomach after eating something that is not good. REV 10 11 ahb4 figs-metonymy γλώσσαις 1 languages This refers to the people who speak the languages. Alternate translation: "many language communities" or "many groups of people who speak their own languages" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.

#### Woe

John describes several "woes" in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third "woe" announced at the end of Chapter 8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Gentiles
The word "Gentiles" here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

#### Two witnesses
Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

#### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
+REV 11 intro s117 0 # Revelation 11 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 15 and 17-18.

### Woe

John describes several "woes" in the book of Revelation. This chapter describes a second and third "woe" announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gentiles
The word "Gentiles" here refers to ungodly people groups and not Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Two witnesses
Scholars have suggested many different ideas about these two witnesses. Translators do not need to understand this passage to accurately translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
REV 11 1 ba9b 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision about receiving a measuring rod and two witnesses that God appointed. This vision also takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets. REV 11 1 lkn6 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι κάλαμος 1 A reed was given to me This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Someone gave me a reed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 11 1 tl86 0 given to me ... I was told The words "me" and "I" refer to John. @@ -521,7 +521,7 @@ REV 11 19 c7pd figs-activepassive καὶ ἠνοίγη ὁ ναὸς τοῦ Θ REV 11 19 d9z7 figs-activepassive ὤφθη ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθήκης ... ἐν τῷ ναῷ αὐτοῦ 1 the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I saw the ark of his covenant in his temple" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 11 19 b6ly ἀστραπαὶ 1 flashes of lightning Use your language's way of describing what lightning looks like each time it appears. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md). REV 11 19 ap5g φωναὶ ... βρονταὶ 1 rumblings, crashes of thunder These are the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language's way of describing the sound of thunder. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md). -REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "A great sign was seen in heaven"
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say "A great sign appeared in heaven." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "A great sign was seen in heaven"
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say "A great sign appeared in heaven." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
REV 12 1 n4ii 0 General Information: John begins to describe a woman who appears in his vision. REV 12 1 d7pw figs-activepassive σημεῖον μέγα ὤφθη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 A great sign was seen in heaven This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "A great sign appeared in heaven" or "I, John, saw a great sign in heaven" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 12 1 j9yl figs-activepassive γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ ἡ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς 1 a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "A woman who was wearing the sun and had the moon under her feet" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ REV 12 15 a9wh αὐτὴν ποταμοφόρητον 1 to sweep her away "to REV 12 16 i4u5 figs-personification ἤνοιξεν ἡ γῆ τὸ στόμα αὐτῆς, καὶ κατέπιεν τὸν ποταμὸν, ὃν ἔβαλεν ὁ δράκων ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 The earth opened its mouth and swallowed the river that the dragon was pouring out of his mouth The earth is spoken of as if it were a living thing, and a hole in the earth is spoken of as if it were a mouth that could drink up the water. Alternate translation: "A hole in the ground opened up and the water went down into the hole" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) REV 12 16 lgt7 writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified in verse 9 as "the devil or Satan." See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 12 17 t6jf ἐχόντων τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ 1 hold to the testimony about Jesus The word "testimony" can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: "continue to testify about Jesus" -REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Similes
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Unknown animals
John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV 13 intro c9mw 0 # Revelation 13 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 10, which are from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Similes
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown animals
John uses different animals to try to describe what he saw. Some of these animals may not be known in the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
REV 13 1 su49 0 General Information: John begins to describe a beast who appears in his vision. The word "I" here refers to John. REV 13 2 k6qh writing-symlanguage δράκων 1 dragon This was a large, fierce reptile, like a lizard. For Jewish people, it was a symbol of evil and chaos. The dragon is also identified as "the devil or Satan." See how you translated this in [Revelation 12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 13 2 xa3a ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ δράκων τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ 1 The dragon gave his power to it The dragon made the beast as powerful as he was. He did not lose his power, however, by giving it to the beast. @@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ REV 13 18 uk74 0 This calls for wisdom "Wisdom is needed" or "You need to be w REV 13 18 z8tz figs-abstractnouns 0 If anyone has insight The word "insight" can be translated with the verb "understand." Alternate translation: "If anyone is able to understand things" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 13 18 ri1y ψηφισάτω τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦ θηρίου 1 let him calculate the number of the beast "he should discern what the number of the beast means" or "he should figure out what the number of the beast means" REV 13 18 bbn2 ἀριθμὸς ... ἀνθρώπου ἐστίν 1 is the number of a human being Possible meanings are 1) the number represents one person or 2) the number represents all of humanity. -REV 14 intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes
### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God's kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
+REV 14 intro q71v 0 # Revelation 14 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to gather ripe food from plants. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so those people can be part of God's kingdom. This chapter uses the metaphor of two harvests. Jesus gathers in his people from the whole earth. Then an angel gathers in wicked people whom God will punish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])
REV 14 1 e7u7 0 General Information: The word "I" refers to John. REV 14 1 ck6y 0 Connecting Statement: John begins to describe the next part of his vision. There are 144,000 believers standing before the Lamb. REV 14 1 a3kz writing-symlanguage Ἀρνίον 1 Lamb A "lamb" is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -669,7 +669,7 @@ REV 14 20 b1bw ληνὸς 1 winepress This is "the great wine vat" of [Revelat REV 14 20 xt4z ἄχρι τῶν χαλινῶν τῶν ἵππων 1 up to the height of a horse's bridle "as high as the bridle in a horse's mouth" REV 14 20 m2i9 τῶν χαλινῶν 1 bridle a device made of leather straps that goes around a horse's head and is used for directing the horse REV 14 20 gdl8 translate-numbers σταδίων 1 1,600 stadia "one thousand six hundred stadia" or "sixteen hundred stadia." A "stadium" is 185 meters. In modern measures this would be about "300 kilometers" or "200 miles." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "Victorious over the beast"

These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### "The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven"
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God's perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God's heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
+REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "Victorious over the beast"

These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### "The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven"
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God's perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God's heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
REV 15 1 p98c 0 General Information: This verse is a summary of what will happen in 15:6-16:21. REV 15 1 l345 figs-doublet μέγα καὶ θαυμαστόν 1 great and marvelous These words have similar meanings and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: "something that greatly amazed me" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) REV 15 1 w6lf 0 seven angels with seven plagues "seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth" @@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ REV 15 6 w9kw ζώνας 1 sashes A sash is a decorative piece of cloth worn on REV 15 7 s4dj τῶν τεσσάρων ζῴων 1 the four living creatures "living being" or "living thing." See how you translated "living creatures" in [Revelation 4:6](../04/06.md) REV 15 7 z1wz figs-explicit ἑπτὰ ... φιάλας χρυσᾶς, γεμούσας τοῦ ... τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 seven golden bowls full of the wrath of God The image of the wine in the bowls can be stated clearly. The word "wrath" here refers to punishment. The wine is a symbol for punishment. Alternate translation: "seven gold bowls full of the wine that represents the wrath of God" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 15 8 s67r ἄχρι τελεσθῶσιν αἱ ἑπτὰ πληγαὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀγγέλων 1 until the seven plagues of the seven angels were completed "until the seven angels finished sending the seven plagues to the earth" -REV 16 intro v1cm 0 # Revelation 16 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter continues the vision of chapter 15. Together they give the seven plagues that complete the wrath of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wrath]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-7.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### "I heard a loud voice call out of the temple"

This is the same temple that was mentioned in chapter 15.

#### Seven bowls of God's wrath

This chapter reveals severe judgments. They are pictured as angels pouring out seven bowls of God's wrath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

The tone of this chapter is meant to astonish the reader. Translations should not minimize the vivid language expressed in this chapter.

#### Armageddon

This is a Hebrew word. It is the name of a place. John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate it using the letters of the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

+REV 16 intro v1cm 0 # Revelation 16 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter continues the vision of chapter 15. Together they give the seven plagues that complete the wrath of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wrath]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### "I heard a loud voice call out of the temple"

This is the same temple that was mentioned in chapter 15.

### Seven bowls of God's wrath

This chapter reveals severe judgments. They are pictured as angels pouring out seven bowls of God's wrath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

The tone of this chapter is meant to astonish the reader. Translations should not minimize the vivid language expressed in this chapter.

### Armageddon

This is a Hebrew word. It is the name of a place. John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate it using the letters of the target language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

REV 16 1 nj83 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the part of the vision about the seven angels with the seven plagues. The seven plagues are the seven bowls of God's wrath. REV 16 1 t995 ἤκουσα 1 I heard The word "I" refers to John. REV 16 1 k2nq figs-explicit φιάλας τοῦ θυμοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 bowls of God's wrath The image of the wine in the bowls can be stated clearly. The word "wrath" here refers to punishment. The wine is a symbol for punishment. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 15:7](../15/07.md). Alternate translation: "bowls full of the wine that represents God's wrath" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -745,7 +745,7 @@ REV 16 19 g6s8 writing-symlanguage 0 he gave that city the cup filled with the REV 16 20 eb5w 0 Connecting Statement: This is part of the seventh bowl of God's wrath. REV 16 20 byn4 figs-metonymy ὄρη οὐχ εὑρέθησαν 1 the mountains were no longer found The inability to see any mountains is metonymy expressing the idea that no mountains existed any longer. Alternate translation: "there were no longer any mountains" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 16 21 i43r translate-bweight ταλαντιαία 1 a talent You may convert this to a modern measure. Alternate translation: "33 kilograms" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Prostitute

Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

#### Seven hills

This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### "The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up "

This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called "the one who is, and who was, and who is to come" elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

#### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: "the beast ... is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings." The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../../rev/17/11.md))
+REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Prostitute

Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Seven hills

This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### "The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up "

This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called "the one who is, and who was, and who is to come" elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: "the beast ... is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings." The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../../rev/17/11.md))
REV 17 1 ppd7 0 General Information: John begins to describe the part of his vision about the great prostitute. REV 17 1 c6f4 figs-abstractnouns τὸ κρίμα τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the condemnation of the great prostitute The noun "condemnation" can be expressed with the verb "condemn." Alternate translation: "how God will condemn the great prostitute" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 17 1 f7ry writing-symlanguage τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the great prostitute "the prostitute that everyone knows about." She represents a certain sinful city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ REV 17 17 el9y figs-activepassive ἄχρι τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ REV 17 18 w2lu 0 Connecting Statement: The angel finishes speaking to John about the prostitute and the beast. REV 17 18 md61 figs-metaphor ἔστιν 1 is Here "is" stands for "represents." (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 17 18 uy1m figs-metonymy ἡ ... πόλις ἡ μεγάλη, ἡ ἔχουσα βασιλείαν 1 the great city that rules When it says that the city rules, it means that the leader of the city rules. Alternate translation: "the great city whose leader rules" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Prophecy

The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Metaphors

Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Prophecy

The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 18 1 fl3m figs-personification 0 General Information: The pronouns "she" and "her" refer to the city of Babylon, which is spoken of as if it were a prostitute. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) REV 18 1 xxe5 0 Connecting Statement: Another angel comes down from heaven and speaks. This is a different angel than the one in the previous chapter, who spoke about the prostitute and the beast. REV 18 2 a2f5 figs-metaphor 0 Fallen, fallen is Babylon the great The angel speaks of Babylon having been destroyed as if it had fallen. See how you translated this in [Revelation 14:8](../14/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ REV 18 23 ja6m figs-metonymy οὐ μὴ ... ἀκουσθῇ ἐν σοὶ ἔ REV 18 23 q8qm figs-metaphor οἱ ἔμποροί σου ἦσαν οἱ μεγιστᾶνες τῆς γῆς 1 your merchants were the princes of the earth The angel speaks of important and powerful people as if they were princes. Alternate translation: "your merchants were like princes of the earth" or "your merchants were the most important men in the world" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 18 23 j3iy figs-activepassive ἐν ... τῇ φαρμακείᾳ σου ἐπλανήθησαν ... τὰ ἔθνη 1 the nations were deceived by your sorcery This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you deceived the people of the nations with your magic spells" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 18 24 s8bp figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῇ αἷμα προφητῶν καὶ ἁγίων εὑρέθη, καὶ πάντων τῶν ἐσφαγμένων ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 In her the blood of prophets and saints was found, and the blood of all who have been killed on the earth Blood being found there means that the people there were guilty of killing people. Alternate translation: "Babylon is guilty of killing the prophets and believers and all the other people in the world who were killed" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 19 intro h785 0 # Revelation 19 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

The beginning of chapter 19 concludes the topic of Babylon falling.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

#### Wedding celebration

The wedding celebration or feast is an important image in Scripture. Jewish culture often pictured paradise, or life with God after death, as a feast. Here, the wedding feast is for the Lamb, who is Jesus, and his bride, who is all his people.
+REV 19 intro h785 0 # Revelation 19 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The beginning of chapter 19 concludes the topic of Babylon falling.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Songs

The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Wedding celebration

The wedding celebration or feast is an important image in Scripture. Jewish culture often pictured paradise, or life with God after death, as a feast. Here, the wedding feast is for the Lamb, who is Jesus, and his bride, who is all his people.
REV 19 1 qu5h 0 General Information: This is the next part of John's vision. Here he describes the rejoicing in heaven over the fall of the great prostitute, who is the city of Babylon. REV 19 1 lr94 ἤκουσα 1 I heard Here "I" refers to John. REV 19 1 nk8x ἁλληλουϊά 1 Hallelujah This word means "Praise God" or "Let us praise God." @@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ REV 19 20 ht8g figs-activepassive ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν οἱ δύο REV 19 20 blr1 0 the fiery lake of burning sulfur "the lake of fire that burns with sulfur" or "place full of fire that burns with sulfur" REV 19 21 h6ea figs-activepassive οἱ λοιποὶ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου, τῇ ἐξελθούσῃ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 The rest of them were killed by the sword that came out of the mouth of the one who rode on the horse This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The rider of the horse killed the remainder of the beast's armies with the sword that extended from his mouth" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 19 21 qk9t τῇ ῥομφαίᾳ ... τῇ ἐξελθούσῃ ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the sword that came out of the mouth The sword blade was sticking out of his mouth. The sword itself was not in motion. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). -REV 20 intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes
### Special concepts in this chapter

#### The thousand-year reign of Christ

In this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

#### Final rebellion

This chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God's ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

#### Great white throne

This chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Hades and the lake of fire
These appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
+REV 20 intro c7eh 0 # Revelation 20 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### The thousand-year reign of Christ

In this chapter, Jesus is said to reign for a thousand years, at the same time that Satan is bound. Scholars are divided over whether this refers to a future period of time or to Jesus reigning now from heaven. It is not necessary to understand this passage in order to translate it accurately. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Final rebellion

This chapter also describes what happens after the thousand years are ended. During this time, Satan and many people will attempt to rebel against Jesus. This will result in God's ultimate and final victory over sin and evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Great white throne

This chapter ends with God judging all people who ever lived. God separates people who believe in Jesus from those who do not believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hades and the lake of fire
These appear to be two distinct places. The translator may wish to do further research to determine how to translate these two places differently. They should not be made the same as each other in translation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
REV 20 1 rkv7 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of an angel throwing the devil into the bottomless pit. REV 20 1 n8b8 καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw Here "I" refers to John. REV 20 1 c18c Ἀβύσσου 1 bottomless pit This is an extremely deep narrow hole. Possible meanings are 1) the pit has no bottom; it continues to go down further forever or 2) the pit is so deep that it is as if it had no bottom. See how you translated this in [Revelation 9:1](../09/01.md). @@ -964,7 +964,7 @@ REV 20 14 lw6b figs-activepassive ὁ θάνατος καὶ ὁ ᾍδης ἐβ REV 20 14 qv55 writing-symlanguage ὁ θάνατος ... ὁ ... δεύτερός 1 the second death "dying a second time." This is described as eternal punishment in the lake of fire in [Revelation 20:14](../20/14.md) and [Revelation 21:8](../21/08.md). See how you translated this in [Revelation 2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: "the final death in the lake of fire" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 20 15 c9pb figs-activepassive εἴ τις οὐχ εὑρέθη ... γεγραμμένος 1 If anyone's name was not found written This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "If God's angel did not find a person's name" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 20 15 wq31 figs-activepassive ἐβλήθη εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός 1 he was thrown into the lake of fire This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the angel threw him into the lake of fire" or "the angel threw him into the place where fire burns forever" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -REV 21 intro pai8 0 # Revelation 21 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter gives a detailed picture of the new Jerusalem.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Second death

Death is a type of separation. The first death is physically dying, when the soul is separated from the body. The second death is being eternally separated from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/soul]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

#### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### New heaven and new earth

It is unclear whether this is an entirely new heaven and earth or if it is remade out of the present heaven and earth. The same is also true of the new Jerusalem. It is possible this will affect translation in some languages. The word "new" in the original language means different and better than the old. It does not mean new in time.
+REV 21 intro pai8 0 # Revelation 21 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter gives a detailed picture of the new Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Second death

Death is a type of separation. The first death is physically dying, when the soul is separated from the body. The second death is being eternally separated from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/soul]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Book of Life

This is a metaphor for eternal life. Those possessing eternal life are said to have their names written in this Book of Life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### New heaven and new earth

It is unclear whether this is an entirely new heaven and earth or if it is remade out of the present heaven and earth. The same is also true of the new Jerusalem. It is possible this will affect translation in some languages. The word "new" in the original language means different and better than the old. It does not mean new in time.
REV 21 1 tj16 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the new Jerusalem. REV 21 1 vks1 εἶδον 1 I saw Here "I" refers to John. REV 21 2 er4u figs-simile ὡς νύμφην, κεκοσμημένην τῷ ἀνδρὶ αὐτῆς 1 like a bride adorned for her husband This compares the new Jerusalem to a bride who has made herself beautiful for her bridegroom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -1011,7 +1011,7 @@ REV 21 26 ps25 οἴσουσιν 1 They will bring "The kings of the earth will REV 21 27 n3nh figs-doublenegatives 0 nothing unclean will ever enter into it, nor anyone This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "only what is clean will ever enter, and never anyone" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) REV 21 27 g7fr figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ οἱ γεγραμμένοι ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τῆς ζωῆς τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 but only those whose names are written in the Lamb's Book of Life This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "but only those whose names the Lamb wrote in his Book of Life" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) REV 21 27 cw99 writing-symlanguage τῷ ... τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 the Lamb This is a young sheep. Here is it used symbolically to refer to Christ. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) -REV 22 intro e1ya 0 # Revelation 22 General Notes
### Structure and formatting

This chapter emphasizes that Jesus is coming soon.

### Special concepts in this chapter

#### Tree of life

There is probably an intended connection between the tree of life in the Garden of Eden and the tree of life mentioned in this chapter. The curse that began in Eden will end at this time.

### Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

#### Alpha and omega

These are the names of the first and last letters in the Greek alphabet. The ULT spells out their names in English. This strategy can serve as a model for translators. Some translators, however, may decide to use the first and last letters in their own alphabet. This would be "A and Z" in English. +REV 22 intro e1ya 0 # Revelation 22 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter emphasizes that Jesus is coming soon.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Tree of life

There is probably an intended connection between the tree of life in the Garden of Eden and the tree of life mentioned in this chapter. The curse that began in Eden will end at this time.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Alpha and omega

These are the names of the first and last letters in the Greek alphabet. The ULT spells out their names in English. This strategy can serve as a model for translators. Some translators, however, may decide to use the first and last letters in their own alphabet. This would be "A and Z" in English. REV 22 1 b1ad 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the new Jerusalem as the angel shows it to him. REV 22 1 uu7b ἔδειξέν μοι 1 showed me Here "me" refers to John. REV 22 1 vl23 ποταμὸν ὕδατος ζωῆς 1 the river of the water of life "the river flowing with life-giving water"